Home

ZyXEL P-660HW-DX User's Manual

1. Back 7 Next gt exit The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select an entry s Active check box to turn on bandwidth management for the service application Service These fields display the services names Priority Select High Mid or Low priority for each service to have your ZyXEL Device use a priority for traffic that matches that service A service with High priority is given as much bandwidth as it needs If you select services as having the same priority then bandwidth is divided equally amongst those services Services not specified in bandwidth management are allocated bandwidth after all specified services receive their bandwidth requirements If the rules set up in this wizard are changed in Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup then the service priority radio button will be set to User Configured The Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup screen allows you to edit these rule configurations Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Table 19 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes
2. METHOD KEY NCR EOS ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL METHOD MANUAL KEY l Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increa
3. LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR nRT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time or VBR RT Variable Bit Rate Real Time for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 21 Advanced
4. NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP 1 WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network LES It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your ZyXEL Device you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some w
5. esee eterne nnne 71 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 21 List of Figures Figure a9 Empe of Baie oii eedan 79 Figura 40 internet Connection PPPOE sci sscsctecsssdaxcous ssoadiawed sosadontessoaniven sansatirniss snsidontenssacsedddabisidute na 81 Figure 41 Advanced Internet Connection Setup iso iere terrre rer rere tke pH rr ted zer Ea tod d 83 Figure 42 More COn NIN es ns en ken ei n a t a aur asa en eR LARA pL Ra p Lc eal aS 84 Figure 43 More Conneccion EdIE oucnscer dieti rtr e pero et ei bob Pet eov vtta ona en nies 86 Figure 44 More Connections Advanced Setup iiec eenecee eri sese te eer eceasecsse niia 88 Figure 45 Traffic Redirect Example iiu receta boss bet n er adh Rl t OR ERR CKIUA Lira Un ud ERI E KRPE IR IU LEUR TBI KR PARAR 89 Figure 46 Trafic Redirect LAN DOUP me eerie hae ee 89 Figure 4r WAN BSSRUIB SUBE eus odd ovde t en MR rote o m an ove eni Modo Lares ht aaa 90 Figure 48 LAM and WAN IP Addresses Louie errata Lega a p toned ek ub PA RAN KuE pA eR REPE RI KR A BREL ERR ade 93 Figure rdc qe 97 PIQUA IP auaa 98 mo Xa pro Rl Ec jg a 99 Figure 52 DHCP SGU ee X 100 Foure eo LAN Ciam Lieb te T rm 101 Figure 54 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks sseennm e 102 zou T gre IFP AIT M 103 Figure 56 Example of a Wireless Network siccccissssancaccissennneuidsstseeteussanaeseuts R9 RR Iu ER Ra REA ERA RE
6. 249 Table 112 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types cccccccssseneeseeenseeceeenseneeceeaneneeeseaneneeeceateneeeseeannanee 249 QE Aussi r iro ge TT 251 Table 114 Maintenance Restore Configuration a eiiieeeeiiee nnne nna ath hn haad hahaha 254 Ne MER IR General cc sis T OO oo mM 257 Tade 116 Diagnostic DSL LINS e w S S GS oe 258 Tabe 117 Hardware SHSCITICSUDMB asiar a A aed lec ANAE 265 Table TS File SpachicatoiS acncusceriodieteieda exbslacasstebeucaiaioiedactasaledccassintaesmeee E Ei 265 Table 119 Wireless Fimware SpneslGallolll uuucemeteexseorisee eux sansrtecmnntensasersdisersudest doaietaeridieaiaedawuriense 267 Tae 120 Standards SUDDOP GE Loseersekks pni EH ci arti Su CER ark Wake pa sa a ea AAE aa aA Rania FEE Pm AE nevis 267 Table Te T MEEE SES Ie qeuidsukeezusdirietoxdodcb FERRE AF REHUND E CRAS QXNE CERRO E Er RED Od CUM QI cede Ide DF EFE RR 275 Table 122 Wireless Security Levels irc LO RD Ete o Orb bd adea n doi acr ida e dg 276 Table 123 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types ssssssseee emm een 279 Table 124 Wireless Security Relational Matrix aeasccsisseieesiesn iecit ttr tek ket de eid dn ers d dk oda 282 P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Tables Table 125 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example sss 302 Toe ZONED 0o C p e PET 303 Table 127 Maxima Host NumDErS tonciscncrsvierercrcceusis betas aiedenstagiyeissscadiiceamnie
7. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 NAT General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable NAT Network Address Translation NAT SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your ZyXEL Device Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your ZyXEL Device Max NAT When computers use peer to peer applications such as file sharing applications they Firewall need to establish NAT sessions If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a Session Per single client can establish this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being User used In this case no additional NAT sessions can be established and users may not be able to access the Internet Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session Use this field to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions each client computer can establish through the ZyXEL Device If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications you can lower this number to ensure no single client is using all of the available NAT sessions Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cance
8. 2 4 5 Status Bandwidth Status Click the Bandwidth Status hyperlink in the Status screen Select an interface from the drop down list box to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth rules The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use Figure 12 Status Bandwidth Status Monitor LAN To LAN Interface ne ie NetMeeting H 323 n 0 kbps VoIP SIP VoIP H 323 TFTP 2 4 6 Status Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable Not all fields are available on all models P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 13 Status Packet Statistics System Monitor System up Time 2 01 27 Current Date Time 01 01 2000 02 08 44 CPU Usage 1 85 Memory Usage 72 WAN Port Statistics Link Status Down WAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Upstream Speed 0 kbps Downstream Speed 0 kbps 1 ENET N A 0 00 00 LAN Port Statistics ae CNN ICT CIEN WOO Interface 100M Full Duplex 9185 15386 Wireless 125M G4 1120 1080 IM SOME The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 7 Status Packet Statistics LAB
9. LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Backup Setup Backup Type Select the method that the ZyXEL Device uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the ZyXEL Device check if the connection to the DSLAM is up Select ICMP to have the ZyXEL Device periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Check WAN IP Configure this field to test your ZyXEL Device s WAN accessibility Type the IP Address1 3 address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address Note If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup you must configure at least one IP address here When using a WAN backup connection the ZyXEL Device periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response Fail Tolerance Type the number of times 2 recommended that your ZyXEL Device may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection Recovery Interval When the ZyXEL Device is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the ZyXEL Device to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic P 660HW Dx User s
10. Suppose that all of the classes except for the administration class need more bandwidth Each class gets up to its budgeted bandwidth The administration class only uses 1024 kbps of its budgeted 2048 kbps The sales and marketing are first to get extra bandwidth because they have the highest priority 6 If they each require 1536 kbps or more of extra bandwidth the ZyXEL Device divides the total 3072 kbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth equally between the sales and marketing departments 1536 kbps extra to each for a total of 3584 kbps for each because they both have the highest priority level Research requires more bandwidth but only gets its budgeted 2048 kbps because all of the unbudgeted and unused bandwidth goes to the higher priority sales and marketing classes 13 6 2 2 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth The following table shows the amount of bandwidth that each class gets Table 72 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration 1024 kbps Sales 3072 kbps Marketing 3072 kbps Research 3072 kbps Suppose that all of the classes except for the administration class need more bandwidth Each class gets up to its budgeted bandwidth The administration class only uses 1024 kbps of its budgeted 2048 kbps The ZyXEL Device divides the total 3072 kbps total of unbudget
11. PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION DESCRIPTION L to W LAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN W to L WAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN L to L LAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or ZyXEL Device the ZyXEL Device W to W WAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN ZyXEL Device or the ZyXEL Device P 660HW Dx User s Guide 247 Chapter 18 Logs Table 110 ICMP Notes TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 0 Echo Reply Echo reply message Destination Unreachable Net unreachable Host unreachable Protocol unreachable Port unreachable Bl ws ny ej o A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment DF Source route failed Source Quench A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network Redirect Redirect datagrams for the Network Redirect datagrams for the Host Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network WI NI RIO Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message 11 Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error
12. Address gt Control Panel Vg Control Panel A Je Switch to Category View See Also A Windows Update Game Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 163 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sak Q 27 Search le Folders E Address Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection E Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network Disable Status device Repair EN Repair this connection Bridge Connections i Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut Rename 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 164 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Accton EN1 207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter This connection uses the following items v E Client for Microsoft Networks v 8 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks um itai impact 5 Description Transmission Control Prot
13. WAN i aS Retu rn traffic for User A s Teln gt session is permitted ri Protected UserA initiates a Telnet session H is LAN i 1 Other Telnet traffic is blocked i d F Fi f E 3 H a i D 1 E LEN E j H D t mt i 2 L rs 3 71 t a at aa The previous figure shows the ZyXEL Device s default firewall rules in action as well as demonstrates how stateful inspection works User A can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN and responses to this request are allowed However other Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 9 5 1 Stateful Inspection Process In this example the following sequence of events occurs when a TCP packet leaves the LAN network through the firewall s WAN interface The TCP packet is the first in a session and the packet s application layer protocol is configured for a firewall rule inspection 1 The packet travels from the firewall s LAN to the WAN 2 The packet is evaluated against the interface s existing outbound access list and the packet is permitted a denied packet would simply be dropped at this point 3 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule to determine and record information about the state of the packet s connection This information is recorded in a new state table entry created for the new connection If there is not a firewall rule for this packet and it is not an attack then
14. NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER NET HOST BITS SUB 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 135 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ERS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 307 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 135 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you
15. Timestamp Timestamp request message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 111 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION lt Facility 8 Severity gt Mon dd hr mm ss hostname src lt srcIP srcPort gt dst lt dstIP dstPort gt msg lt msg gt note lt note gt devID lt mac address last three numbers gt cat lt category gt This message is sent by the system RAS displays as the system name if you haven t configured one when the router generates a syslog The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU gt LOGS gt Log Settings page The severity is the log s syslog class The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix The devID is the last three characters of the MAC address of the router s LAN port The cat is the same as the category in the router s logs The following table shows RFC 2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type Table 112 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SA Security Association PROP Proposal TRANS Transform KE Key Exchange ID Identification CER
16. 10 10 DoS Thresholds 10 10 1 For DoS attacks the ZyXEL Device uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established These thresholds apply globally to all sessions You can use the default threshold values or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements Refer to Section 10 10 3 on page 173 to configure thresholds Threshold Values Tune these parameters when something is not working and after you have checked the firewall counters These default values should work fine for most small offices Factors influencing choices for threshold values are The maximum number of opened sessions The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network The CPU power of servers in your LAN network Network bandwidth Type of traffic for certain servers If your network is slower than average for any of these factors especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy then the default values should be reduced You should make any changes to the threshold values before you continue configuring firewall rules P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration 10 10 2 Half Open Sessions An unusually high number of half open sessions either an absolute number or measured as the arrival rate could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is occurring For TCP half open means that the session has not reach
17. Table 41 Commonly Used Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to a
18. IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554
19. gt rule rule gt UDP destport Device check for UDP traffic with this single port 4 destination address You may repeat this command to enter various non consecutive port numbers config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL gt rule rule gt UDP destport Device check for UDP traffic with a range lt start port gt lt end port destination port in this range gt Delete config delete firewall e mail This command removes all of the settings for e mail alert config delete firewall attack This command resets all of the attack response settings to their defaults config delete firewall set set gt This command removes the specified set from the firewall configuration P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix E Firewall Commands Table 136 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config delete firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt This command removes the specified rule ina firewall configuration set P 660HW Dx User s Guide Internal SPTGEN This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage Actual menus for your product may differ Internal SPTGEN Overview Internal SPTGEN System Parameter Table Generator is a configuration text file useful for efficient configuration of mul
20. Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 5 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices Allow or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen To change your ZyXEL Device s MAC filter settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 70 MAC Address Filter MAC Filter MAC Filter Active MAC Filter Filter Action Allow C Deny 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 Cancel 00 00 00 00 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 39 MAC Address Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active MAC Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device Set This is the index number
21. DSL Line o M Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully ATM Status ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line Capture All Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 116 Diagnostic DSL Line LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status ATM Loopback Test Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VCIs before you begin this test The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the ZyXEL Device The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network DSL Line Status Click this button to view the DSL port s line operating values and line bit allocation Reset ADSL Line Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully Capture All Logs Click this button to display all logs generated with the DSL line P 660HW Dx User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs
22. LLC Network Name S Channel Selectio Security Automa nav ey Recommended Network Key WPA WEP Key Finish button to close this zard or click the following link to open other pages Return to Wizard Main Page Go to Advanced Setup Page 7 Launch your web browser and navigate to www zyxel com Internet access is just the beginning Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of ZyXEL Device features If you cannot access the Internet open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access P 660HW Dx User s Guide Bandwidth Management Wizard This chapter shows you how to configure basic bandwidth management using the wizard screens 4 1 Introduction Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the ZyXEL Device s WAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to service bandwidth requirements This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services S
23. P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 28 DHCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server The ZyXEL Device passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP address to the DHCP clients Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS This field is not available when you set DHCP to Relay Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the Server DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask If the fields are left as 0 0 0 0 the ZyXEL Device acts as a DNS proxy and forwards the DHCP client s DNS query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 6 LAN Client List This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To change your ZyXEL Device s static DHCP settings click Network gt LAN gt Client List The screen appears as shown Figure 53 LAN Client List DHCP Client Table E Client List IP Address o 0 0 0 tw11947 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Add DRESS RNC IP Address N
24. You can also subscribe to category based content filtering that allows your ZyXEL Device to check web sites against an external database Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the ZyXEL Device P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 118 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Any IP The Any IP feature allows one computer to connect to the ZyXEL Device and then to other computers when their IP addresses are in different subnets This is done without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the Internet thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails Triple Play The ZyXEL Device is capable of simultaneously transferring data voice and video over the Internet IP Policy Routing IPPR Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to
25. 0 Mask 210202010 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Port 0 210202011 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Port lt 0 none 1 equal 0 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210202013 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210202014 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Act Not 1 check 1 Match next 2 forward 3 drop gt Table 145 Menu 23 System Menus Menu 23 1 System Password Setup FI FN PVA INPUT 230000000 System Password 1234 Menu 23 2 System security radius server FI FN PVA INPUT 230200001 Authentication Server Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 230200002 Authentication Server Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt i 230200003 Authentication Server IP Address 192 168 1 32 230200004 Authentication Server Port 1822 230200005 Authentication Server Shared Secret 111111111111 111 Bis Ms is Bi aN I Te LLLI 230200006 Accounting Server Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt o 230200007 Accounting Server Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt Sagl 230200008 Accounting Server IP Address 192 168 1 44 230200009 Accounting Server Port 1823 230200010 Accounting Server Shared Secret 1234 Menu 23 4 System security IEEE802 1x FI FN PVA INPUT 230400001 Wireless Port Control lt 0 Authentication 2 Required 1 No Access All
26. 19 2 MENINGES teeta bad abd apa a al apa cael pnd teen pudo vea adi adu iau bai uid 233 10 2 SOU Log SENN c r 234 195 1 Example E mell LOEJ iuiienridi np ERRERCHERUEF FOLE RS HET SE Ra ES Ka PO HS SSH E vem 236 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Ta dg 5177 M 237 Chapter 19 E e E E E T A EAA ET T E E A PE ETETE A Pree E A TA 251 TFA Te UTTE a R 251 19 2 Coniguration SCRIGN e 253 19 2 1 Backup Cou SIE cic ca usshissnccausisaesdacideresianiaaciedadnusecansiagedecanuabuleccetadsalicanslalanaicens 253 1922 eStore CON ITO e 254 19252 Back Io Factory DoS RG 255 DN A S RR RN T I a T 255 Chapter 20 lc T TTH 257 20 1 General DIAQNOSEG e 257 Ale DSL Dune DIB OSIMS cs cacenatsi sahedeau distet Hasen enadebissscadutosal Manduadini dob dad babel 257 Chapter 21 Do c Mme P TRIER 259 21 1 Powe Hardware Connections and LEDS iced aei td PR Fx E sirova E RoVE eco Per Eae 259 21 2 ZYXEL Device Access and Logi ces AW ier nat RON ER RAUBHR RE UB ERR BEDS DER A UE R eL RE 260 US dq Fe c nratas aE 261 Part VII Appendices and Index esesssse 263 Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting cccccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeess 265 Appendix B Wireless LANS ausiucer rex UFU EAE
27. 5 6 1 More Connections Edit Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to configure a connection P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 43 More Connections Edit General M Active Name Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Multiplexing VPI VCI IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Connection NAT C None SUA Only C Obtain an IP Address Automatically static IP Address Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 C Nailed Up Connection Connect on Demand Max Idle timeout Edit ChangeMe Routing PPPoA 7 vc v n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 sec Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 More Connections Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection Name Enter a unique descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection Mode Select Routing from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account If you select Bridge the ZyXEL Device will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node otherwise the packets are discarded Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices are PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE User Name PPPoA and PPPoE encapsu
28. Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field de
29. Multiplexing Virtual Circuit ID PI isi Select the VEL virtual Path Identifier and Cl Virtual Channel Identifier 65535 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode From the Mode drop down list box select Routing default if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplexing Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based Virtual Circuit VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit ID Refer to the appendix for more information VPI Enter the VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured Back Click Back to go back to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above Exit Click Exit to close
30. Site Survey Profile LL TOET gt Transfer Rate Fully Auto Preamble Type Power Saving Mode X Auto x X Continuous Access Mode Iv OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology Setup Key 01234567 Start 7 4 2 Starting OTIST You must click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen and in the wireless client s Adapter screen all within three minutes at the time of writing You can start OTIST in the wireless clients and AP in any order but they must all be within range and have OTIST enabled 1 Inthe AP a web configurator screen pops up showing you the security settings to transfer You can use the key in this screen to set up WPA PSK encryption manually for non OTIST devices in the wireless network After reviewing the settings click OK Figure 65 Security Key Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 The security is WPA PSK mode on WLAN now The key is 8KULuwehvU 2 This screen appears while OTIST settings are being transferred It closes when the transfer is complete Figure 66 OTIST in Progress AP Auto Security in Process Please wait a moment about 149 Seconds P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 67 OTIST in progress Client OTIST in progress please wait for 3 minutes i Cancel In the wireless client you see this screen if it can t find an OTIST enabled AP with the same Setup k
31. Table 16 Manually assign a WEP key LABEL DESCRIPTION Key The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission Enter any 5 13 or 29 ASCII characters or 10 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP key respectively Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 5 Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings Figure 32 Wireless LAN Setup 3 STEP 1 STEP2 fa Wireless LAN Click the Apply Button to Note If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Apply Button Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process B An P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access 6 Use the read only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct Click Finish to complete and save the wizard setup Figure 33 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete CONGRATULATIONS The Interne tup configuration is complete Here is your curre Mode Routing Encapsulation ENET ENCAP
32. The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 Simole Service Discovery Protocol SSDP is a discovery service searching for Universal Plug and Play devices on your home network or upstream Internet gateways using DUDP port 1900 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Table 61 Predefined Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRMWORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary fu
33. Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB 5 Inthe Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 124 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services O AIP Listener 0 0 MB il Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB g sal Plug and Play Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 16 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL Device P 660HW Dx User s Guide 21 7 Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device 16 4 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 125 Network Connections Network Connect
34. inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency however they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support See Section 9 5 on page 148 for more information on stateful inspection Firewalls of one type or another have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises 9 3 Introduction to ZyXEL s Firewall The ZyXEL Device firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated The ZyXEL Device s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The ZyXEL Device can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The ZyXEL Device also has packet filtering capabilities The ZyXEL Device is installed between the LAN and the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The ZyXEL Device has one DSL ISDN port and one Ethernet LAN port which physically separate the network into two areas The DSL ISDN port connects to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet serv
35. keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 156 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example NEL a Ne Internet D m x m Es e AZ Ml WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 157 WPA 2 PSK Authentication PSK gt vu Internet Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 124 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
36. see CBR copyright 347 CoS 194 CTS Clear to Send 274 custom ports creating editing 164 customer support 351 customized services 164 D date and time settings 229 default 255 default LAN IP address 37 default settings 253 254 Denial of Service see DoS destination address 157 detection 54 device model number 251 DHCP 94 199 227 diagnostic DSL line 257 general 257 Differentiated Services 194 DiffServ Code Point DSCP 194 DiffServ Code Points 194 DiffServ marking rule 194 Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer see DSLAM dimensions 265 disclaimer 347 DNS 94 210 domain name 134 227 228 domain name system see DNS DoS 144 145 173 basics 145 types 146 downstream 33 34 DS Field 194 DS field 194 DSCPs 194 DSL reinitialize 258 DSLAM 33 dynamic DNS 199 dynamic WEP key exchange 279 DYNDNS wildcard 199 E EAP Authentication 277 ECHO 134 E Mail 127 e mail 67 log example 236 Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol see ENET ENCAP encapsulation 75 76 PPP over Ethernet 75 PPPoA 76 RFC 1483 76 encryption 107 110 280 and local user database 107 key 108 WPA compatible 108 ENET ENCAP 75 ESS 272 ESSID 109 Ethernet adapter card 285 Extended Service Set IDentification see ESSID Extended Service Set See ESS 272 Extended wireless security 63 F factory defaults 253 255 fairness based scheduler 189 FCC interference statement 347 File Transfer Protocol see FTP filena
37. 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses BES Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 3 2 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives In Only the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Out Only the ZyXEL Device will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version f
38. 9 1 Firewall Overview Originally the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network Of course firewalls cannot solve every security problem A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy It should never be the on y mechanism or method employed For a firewall to guard effectively you must design and deploy it appropriately This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy In addition specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself Refer to Section 10 5 on page 158 to configure default firewall settings Refer to Section 10 6 on page 159 to view firewall rules Refer to Section 10 6 1 on page 161 to configure firewall rules Refer to Section 10 6 2 on page 164 to configure a custom service Refer to Section 10 10 3 on page 173 to configure firewall thresholds 9 2 Types of Firewalls There are three main types of firewalls Packet Filtering Firewalls Application level Firewalls Stateful Inspection Firewalls 9 2 1 Packet Filtering Firewalls Packet filtering firewalls restrict access based on the source destinati
39. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless clients must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you want to manually set the WEP key enter any 5 13 or 29 characters ASCII string or 10 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP key respectively Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup 7 3 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK In order to configure and enable WPA 2 PSK authentication click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 60 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 PSK General Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz j Security Security Mode wra2 psK v WPA Compatible Pre Shared Key rdupXEnnCf ReAuthentication Timer 500 In Seconds Idle Timeout 5600 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer fisoo In Seconds Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 35 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the dr
40. Time Protocol Select the time service protocol that your time server uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main difference between them is the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 The default NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Enable Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 System Table 91 System Time Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples
41. ZyXEL Device Access and Login Internet Access 21 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs P The ZyXEL Device does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL Device 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor e One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 4 on page 35 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on If the problem continues contact the vendor ah wD P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Troubleshooting 21 2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address ofthe ZyXEL Device it dep
42. and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the ZyXEL Device s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the ZyXEL Device reacts based on the corresponding firewall policy to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet or an ICMP port unreachable packet for a blocked UDP packets or just drop the packets without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator 16 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See Section 16 2 1 on page 214 for configuration instructions 16 1 1 How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network
43. at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 121 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5111 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network P 660HW Dx User s Guide 275 Appendix B Wireless LANs BS Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device Table 122 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Most Secure WPA2 You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that
44. cache hit The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache but does not know the category type oo s 3s cache hit The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache and knows the category type oo S Trusted Web site The web site is in a trusted domain oo S When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn t select the Block Matched Web Site check box the system forwards the web content Waiting content filter server timeout The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period DNS resolving failed The ZyXEL Device cannot get the IP address of the external content filtering via DNS query Creating socket failed The ZyXEL Device cannot issue a query because TCP IP socket creation failed port port number Connecting to content filter server fail The connection to the external content filtering server failed License key is invalid The external content filtering license key is invalid P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 104 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION attack TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF attack attack ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 lan
45. select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turnon your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 172 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices vL File Profile Help f B Ff x New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts jac You may configure network devices associated with a5 physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device Nickname Type X Inactive ethO ethO Ethemet 2 Double click on the profile of
46. service IPSEC_TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
47. standards Maximum data rates attainable for each standard are shown in the next table Table 1 ADSL Standards DATARATESTANDARD UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM ADSL 832 kbps 8Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 12Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 24Mbps If your ZyXEL Device does not support Annex M the maximum ADSL2 2 upstream data rate is 1 2 Mbps ZyXEL Devices which work over ISDN do not support Annex M The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable Actual speeds attained also depend on the distance from your ISP line quality etc P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device 1 2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL Device using a supported web browser Command Line Interface Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore Chapter 19 on page 251 SNMP The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager See the SNMP chapter in this User s Guide SPTGEN SPTGEN is a text configuration file that allows you to configure the device by uploading an SPTGEN file This is especially convenient if you need to configure many devices of the same type 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device Do the following things regularly to make th
48. through Config edit firewall set set f rule rule gt active yes no This command sets whether a rule is enabled or not Config edit firewall set set f rule rule gt protocol integer protocol value gt This command sets the protocol specification number made in this rule for ICMP Config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt log lt none match not match both gt This command sets the ZyXEL Device to log traffic that matches the rule doesn t match both or neither Config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt alert lt yes no gt This command sets whether or not the ZyXEL Device sends an alert e mail when a DOS attack or a violation of a particular rule occurs config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr single lt ip address gt This command sets the rule to have the ZyXEL Device check for traffic with this individual source address config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr subnet lt ip address gt lt subnet mask gt This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL Device check for traffic from a particular subnet defined by IP address and subnet mask config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr range lt start ip address gt lt end ip address gt This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL Device check for traffic from this range
49. 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 127 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the numbe
50. 1 ID Adjust TCP MSS to d The router automatically changed the TCP Maximum Segment Size value after establishing a tunnel Rule d input idle time The tunnel for the listed rule was dropped because there was out disconnect no inbound traffic within the idle timeout period XAUTH succeed Username The router used extended authentication to authenticate the Username listed username XAUTH fail Username The router was not able to use extended authentication to Username authenticate the listed username Rule d Phase 1 negotiation mode mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 negotiation mode did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 encryption algorithm mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 authentication algorithm mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 106 IKE Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Rule d Phase 1 The listed rule s IKE phase 1 authentication method did not authentication method match between the router and the peer mismatch Rule d Phase 1 key group The listed rule s IKE phase 1 key group did not match misma
51. 279 280 application example 281 WWW 127 Z zero configuration Internet access 80 ZyXEL s firewall introduction 144 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index P 660HW Dx User s Guide
52. 4 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on Reboot the ZyXEL Device 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for bandwidth management If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider changing the allocations e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index Product Specifications and Wall Mounting 265 Wireless LANs 271 Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 285 IP Addresses and Subnetting 301 Firewall Commands 309 Internal SPTGEN 315 Command Interpreter 331 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 333 NetBIOS Filter Commands 339 Splitters and Microfilters 341 Triangle Route 345 Legal Information 347 Customer
53. 90 Firewall Configure Customized Services Config Service Name l Service Type TCP v Port Configuration Type Single Port Range Port Number From 0 To o Back Apply Cancel Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Firewall Configure Customized Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Type a unique name for your custom port Service Type Choose the IP port TCP UDP or TCP UDP that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Port Configuration Type Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service Port Number Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen Delete Click Delete to delete the current rule and return to the previous screen 10 7 Example Firewall Rule The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical MyService connection from the Internet 1 Click Security gt Firewall gt Rules 2 Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 91 Firewall Example Rules Rules Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 3 ov 1
54. Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 132 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 133 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 133 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 134 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning
55. By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x P 660HW Dx User s Guide 277 Appendix B Wireless LANs For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MDS authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MDS authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WE
56. COELAN Com LE anana 101 67 LAMIP ANAS aate elu i aoa Ron GR o E d d n td 102 Chapter 7 Wireloss LAN Pau 105 241 Wireless Network QVelVieW icit oett bande M apr u te ME a ics E Po E RENDIR e E EER 105 Ta UDLIccNe CJ gERl 1 7 qe 106 E Eeuna e Pern rer Re Lenn eee cost Pere near ee M De UP C o epar Crap ee nn ery arr 106 Taa MAC Address FINE e M 106 TLS USET Pte CANON senian ET 106 pg Nazaire Em 107 7 2 5 One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST neueren 108 7 3 General Wireless LAN Sereen ausirai anaietan anad ERR LINER RR BER M ba KIM T PAM SUE a 108 n WE ober clic 109 Lae NEF EDOT ON e M 110 Taa WPAP S NFA POT aoa ioa OU a OH AEA Gat onus EASAN EAA 111 Fe WEP PITRE T 113 7 3 9 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup uuo bod a d e a Eire o EH opted ep d det 115 pro Teig MES 117 p MEC ONS T aniei a ae 117 Pa T sd T 119 15 9 Nols OW OTIST sirenu N 120 TOMAC d aoaaa en animes 121 A E o o ETE E E E E E EE E A E E T A E E T 122 POA WMM QOS EXAMP IT n eae NA EEE EEEN E 122 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 13 Table of Contents ae WMU COSS PHOFI BS isu 5s etear i od e b deceat E Ebr EE Fo aa Per Ehe EUR E eL EE RE 4 122 UGACRO DU MNT MM CET 123 REGES cic Re M 125 P4 TOS Type Of Serice end WMM E395 ioci assen xn ed e ado bcr anda e ade 125 1 7 2 Application Prorty CORBIQUESUO scie
57. Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and fo
58. Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix M Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix M Customer Support P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index A AALS 76 access point see AP Address Resolution Protocol see ARP ADSL standards 34 ADSL l
59. Figure 88 on page 162 When an event generates an alert a message can be immediately sent to an e mail account that you specify in the Log Settings screen Refer to the chapter on logs for details 10 5 General Firewall Policy Click Security gt Firewall to display the following screen Activate the firewall by selecting the Active Firewall check box as seen in the following screen Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information Figure 86 Firewall General General General M Active Firewall Bypass Triangle Route yo Caution When Bypass Triangle Route is checked all LAN to LAN and WAN to WAN packets will bypass the Firewall check WAN to LAN poo Iv LAN to WAN Permit gt 2 WAN to WAN Router Drop z 2 LAN to LAN Router Permt gt r Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Firewall General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The ZyXEL Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Bypass Triangle Route Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device firewall permit the use of triangle route topology on the network See the appendix for more on triangle route topology Note Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WA
60. Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 25 WAN Backup Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout Type the number of seconds 3 recommended for your ZyXEL Device to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request The WAN connection is considered down after the ZyXEL Device times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the Internet Active Traffic Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device use traffic redirect if the normal Redirect WAN connection goes down Note If you activate traffic redirect you must configure at least one Check WAN IP Address Metric This field sets this route s priority among the routes the ZyXEL Device uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The ZyX
61. IP address of the ZyXEL Device Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 131 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sak 27 yo Search Folders Ea Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection 5 Create a new connection 9 Set up a home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also d Local Area Connection Network Troubleshooter Enabled E a Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places Cy Control Panel My Network Places E My Documents My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 132 Network Connections My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ee c 27 Search m Folders E Address 9 My Network Places Network Tasks a Add a network place view network connecti
62. Internet Configuration You should be able to ac he Internet now CONGRATULATIO The Internet S p configuration is complete Continue to Wireless Setup wizard ERR No 2 Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN and OTIST Click Next to continue P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 28 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 Teas TEP SD fa Wireless LAN Iv Active Uncheck this option if you like do deactivate your w Enable OTIST Check here to set up 4 ZyAIR client adapter that supports OTIST Note OTIST will automatically configure the SSID and security settings on both your router and your wireless clients In order for this to work you must be using ZyXEL client adaptors that support OTIST The OTIST configuration process may take up to 3 minutes The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN Enable OTIST Select the check box to enable OTIST if you want to transfer your ZyXEL Device s SSID and WPA PSK security settings to wireless clients that support OTIST and are within transmission range You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless client at the same time The process takes three minutes to complete Note Enable OTIST only if your wireless clients support WPA and OTIST Setup
63. Internet Connection Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Zero Configuration This feature is not applicable available when you configure the ZyXEL Device to use a static WAN IP address or in bridge mode Select Yes to set the ZyXEL Device to automatically detect the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and make the necessary configuration changes Select No to disable this feature You must manually configure the ZyXEL Device for Internet access PPPoE Passthrough This feature is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation In addition to the ZyXEL Device s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL Device Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 5 6 Configuring More Connections This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote network They are required for placing c
64. Key Type an OTIST Setup Key of up to eight ASCII characters in length Be sure to use the same OTIST Setup Key on the ZyXEL Device and wireless clients Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 Configure your wireless settings in this screen Click Next P 660HW Dx User s Guide et Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 29 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 f Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Give your network a name You will search for this name from your wireless clients Channel Selection Channel 05 2437MHz annels You should use the default channel unless other e channel Manually assign a VPA PSK key Id prefer to create your own key WPA is stronger than WEP but not all lt Back next gt Mi exit The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless Name SSID LAN If you change this field on the ZyXEL Device make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g wireless devices is called a Selection channel Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device Security Select Au
65. Network icon to open the Network window P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 158 WIndows 95 98 Me Network C onfiguration Network Ez LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI Tx NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCPAP gt 3Com EtherLink Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Configuring 1 Inthe Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab f you
66. New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel 288 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 161 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer S Outlook Express WV Paint 88 Files and Settings Transfer W D ERY Command Prompt e My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 Tour Windows xP R Windows Movie Maker All Programs gt untitled Paint 7 My Documents 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures 4 My Computer ce Printers and Faxes Help and Support og Off 0 Turn OFF Computer 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT amp Control Panel File Edit Tools Help View Favorites Figure 162 Windows XP Control Panel s d JO search ic Folders E
67. Note When the number of incomplete connections TCP UDP gt Maximum Incomplete High the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS firewall dynamic sessions until incomplete connections Maximum Incomplete Low Access block sent TCP RST The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism via Cl command sys firewall tcprst Table 98 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Generic packet filter matched set d rule d Attempted access matched a configured filter rule denoted by its set and rule number and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 99 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy ICMP ICMP access matched the default policy and was lt Packet Direction gt lt type d gt blocked or forwarded according to the user s setting For lt code d gt type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 Firewall rule NOT match ICMP ICMP access matched or didn t match a firewall rule Packet Direction lt rule d gt denoted by its number and was blocked or forwarded lt type d gt lt code d gt according to the rule For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 Triangle route packet forwarded The firewall allowed a triangle route session t
68. OX HERS ERR UEKR EF LRRV PEE LUPUR UEM PR E XNMREE ODE pU MEE 271 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address sssssseeH HH 285 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting iusaesescrinax rere Erebi eade dote Ga OUT dn De RU GERA 301 Appendix E Firewall Commands usce i rUPbxe lee Vp EbR M a tU cu DRr DEP P RUND F IAE TH DLE Ic dtd 309 Appendix F Interea SP TSN sai inopem etie ERU FPE TERERRERK S ER ERE PAR ieee 315 Appendix G Command Interpreter uui ciside rea EUR Eee MeRL AI MEER DRE P SUUM LbUFH EDI BL POL IURE 331 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions ssssss 333 Appendix NetBIOS Filter Commands iscedeuadeereia pha pRbb INFR a EK Fr MExpA KR bE MIO IMPER ER QURE 339 Appendix J Splitters and Mierofilfers iussccirerc rtr RR ERR UU ERR DECR ME RARIOR Fe a 341 Appendix K Tringle PODUIG iis dci cete E LUE Qu Re heb ERE REED RIA CAE E Ern eX P LE MED UHR DII SUI PERDE NEM 345 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Appendix L Legal Information c cccssessecceenececaeceaeeaeecaeceaeccecceeceeaeceeceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeess 347 Appendix M Customer Support iiie suse rk utar E AIDE A aa EEEE EAE EEA D EA EARN RE REIS 351 NUE e M 357 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1 Protected Internet Access
69. PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 39 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC SCR R lt gt Time 5 3 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 5 3 1 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate d
70. Return to go back to the Firmware screen 252 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 Tools Figure 142 Error Message System Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return 19 2 Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next Figure 143 Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration to you computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file on your computer to the Prestige please type a location for storing the configuration file or click Browse to look for one and then click Upload File path Browse Upload Reset to Factory Default Settings Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration and return the Prestige to the factory default settings The following default settings would become effective after click Reset Password 1234 Lan IP 192 168 1 1 DHCP Server Reset 19 2 1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up save the ZyXEL Device s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly it i
71. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 13 11 Bandwidth Monitor To view the ZyXEL Device s bandwidth usage and allotments click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Select an interface from the drop down list box to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth rules The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use The screen refreshes every few seconds P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Figure 109 Bandwidth Management Monitor Monitor Lan To LAN Interface MMC FTP E Mail Telnet NetMeeting H 323 VoIP SIP VoIP H 323 TFTP 0 kbps D kbps D kbps 2 kbps j 0 kbps 0 kbps 0 kbps 0 kbps Table 80 Bandwidth Management Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Monitor This section allows you to select which network to monitor You may select either a LAN WLAN or WAN After selecting a network to monitor information on active services and their bandwidth usage will appear P 660HW Dx User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your ZyXEL Device to use Dynamic DNS 14 1 Dynamic DNS Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services
72. SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The ZyXEL Device reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN 3 The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the ZyXEL Device As a result the ZyXEL Device resets the connection as the connection has not been acknowledged Appendix K Triangle Route Figure 202 Triangle Route Problem LAN M ISP 2 Internet ISP 1 The Triangle Route Solutions This section presents you two solutions to the triangle route problem IP Aliasing IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface Your ZyXEL Device supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the ZyXEL Device being the gateway for each logical network By putting your LAN and Gateway B in different subnets all returning network traffic must pass through the ZyXEL Device to your LAN The following steps describe such a scenario 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The ZyXEL Device reroutes the packet to Gateway A which is in Subnet 2 3 The reply from WAN goes through the ZyXEL Device to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1 Figure 203 IP Alias LAN Subnet 1 WAN Internet Subnet 2 3 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL
73. Send Immediate Alert Iv System Maintenance Vv System Errors Vv System Errors M Access Control M Access Control M Blocked Web Sites M UPnP Iv Attacks IV Forward Web Sites M Blocked Web Sites Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION E mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends Not all ZyXEL models have this field Send Log To The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e mail Send Alerts To Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 93 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Schedule This drop down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages bein
74. Support 351 Index 357 Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Product Specifications The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Device s hardware and firmware features M4 Table 117 Hardware Specifications Dimensions W x D x H 180 x 128 x 36 mm Power Specification 12V AC 1A Built in Switch Four auto negotiating auto MDI MDI X 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports Operation Temperature 0 C 40 C Storage Temperature 20 60 C Operation Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Humidity 10 90 RH Distance between the 108 mm centers of the holes for wall mounting on the device s back Screw size for wall M4 Tap Screw mounting Antenna The ZyXEL Device is equipped with one 3dBi fixed antenna Table 118 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Admin Password 1234 Default User Password user DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and A web configurator an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Note Only upload firmware for your specific model P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 118 Firmw
75. TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet for a TCP packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message for a UDP packet to the sender Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets Source Destination Address Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular single IP a range of IP addresses e g 192 168 1 10 to 192 169 1 50 a subnet or any IP address Select an option from the drop down list box that includes Single Address Range Address Subnet Address and Any Address Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask here if applicable Add gt gt Click Add gt gt to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box You can add multiple addresses ranges of addresses and or subnets Edit lt lt To edit an existing source or destination address select it from the box and click Edit lt lt Delete Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it Services Available Selected Services Please see Section 10 8 on page 169 for more information on services available Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left t
76. TT IET 55 ceri Eden ale IE MID OPEN EOS 55 2 0 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup uino iaren ai ri cob d bt bj dax a endida Ere Fb visa 60 3 3 1 Manually assign a WPA PSK Kay iuuisciecodeec s brit n ek er ena one eis 63 ac Mamialy assin a WEP Wey caeci nisnete uteibrteiv teu ase dut CIPUE OB Dad eoa x ua bob RDEUE 63 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard lleeeeueeeeeeeeeeeLeeieeesseeeeeeeeene nnne n nnne nnn nnn 67 LUE Se Rc 67 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services esssseeeee 67 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard Setup ceci cciisseeiesei seen sene tnn danti anna d a aud dua 68 FAIT IP NOBNOUR s iet sin td ADU HE Yu uN A KE E ERR D EU 73 Chapter 5 WAN SEP sie tae sa cc sade 75 VE LER T 75 mL Ep Uai a a a a Pete crn 75 D12 MUNPIEXINO C 76 5 1 3 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios 1 5 rrt rrt E eet rad retta 76 eee VETE ST sasoaextonsed aspe Maie iube oS e teen ed cu EPA MID MERE pM REN M IT 5 1 IP Address Assignment See y 5 16 Nailed Up Connection PPP ecce e pU apnea pa dod d bp pud indent 77 tl NAT PE 78 ura lg 78 S TESI BN SALINE Y aiii cac tn seman A hn dwn nd MR UR Ta ob CU ee UI Ub p Up PR asain as ERA dd 78 REGN rahe lasses suiicacentirzesseeynneuncg nei ae wanes Ea ERAAN Eia 79 o4 Zero Configurati
77. Table 136 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold rate of new minute high lt 0 255 gt half open sessions per minute where the ZyXEL Device starts deleting old half opened sessions until it gets them down to the minute low threshold config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open minute low 0 255 sessions where the ZyXEL Device stops deleting half opened sessions config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open max incomplete high 0 255 sessions where the ZyXEL Device starts deleting old half opened sessions until it gets them down to the max incomplete low config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold where the max incomplete low 0 255 ZyXEL Device stops deleting half opened sessions config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open tcp max incomplete 0 255 TCP sessions with the same destination where the ZyXEL Device starts dropping half open sessions to that destination Sets config edit firewall set set This command sets a name to identify a f name desired name specified set Config edit firewall set set f default permit forward block This command sets whether a packet is dropped or allowed through when it does not meet a rule within the set Config edit firewall s
78. The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 129 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 130 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 131 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP
79. Use this screen to view and configure other connections for placing calls to another remote gateway WAN Backup Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and Setup WAN backup settings P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings enable Any IP and other advanced properties DHCP Setup Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP settings Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to configure servers behind the ZyXEL Device Address Mapping Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall and the direction of network traffic to which to apply the rule Rules This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Anti Probing Use this screen to change your anti probing settings Threshold Use this screen to configure the threshold for DoS attacks Content Filter Keyword Use this screen to b
80. a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the ZyXEL Device Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your ZyXEL Device that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA
81. access the ZyXEL Device using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 5 Telnet Login Use the following steps to Telnet into your ZyXEL Device s command interpreter See Appendix G on page 331 for more about the commands 1 Ifyour computer is connected to the ZyXEL Device over the Internet skip to the next step Make sure your computer IP address and the ZyXEL Device IP address are on the same subnet 2 In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner and Run Then type telnet and the ZyXEL Device s IP address For example enter telnet 192 168 167 1 the default IP address 3 Click OK A login screen displays Enter the password at the prompts The default password is 1234 The password is case sensitive P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration 15 6 Configuring FTP You can upload and download the ZyXEL Device s firmware and configuration files using FTP please see the chapter on firmware and confi
82. always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 32 entries in this table Modify Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table 6 7 LAN IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The ZyXEL Device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN s logical networks subnets Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A B and C Figure 54 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks Ethernet Interface ee A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 B 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 C 192168 3 1 192 168 3 24 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup To change your ZyXEL Device s IP alias settings click Network gt LAN gt IP Alias The screen appears as shown Figure 55 LAN IP Alias IP Alias 1 TIP Alias 1 IP Address IP Sub
83. amount of bandwidth that can be used for the traffic that matches this rule Enable DiffServ Select this option to enable DiffServ marking on the ZyXEL Device Marking P 660HW Dx User s Guide 495 Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Table 78 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DiffServ mark Select the marking rule from the drop down list The first three digits are the DiffServ code point A packet with the lowest priority mark will be dropped when the line is busy Filter Configuration Service This field simplifies bandwidth class configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application When you select a predefined application you do not configure the rest of the bandwidth filter fields other than enabling or disabling the filter SIP Session Initiation Protocol is a signaling protocol used in Internet telephony instant messaging and other VoIP Voice over IP applications Select SIP from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses SIP File Transfer Protocol FTP is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP IP networks A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client The service allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files Select FTP from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for
84. are coming from within the trusted network To engage in IP spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed through the router or firewall The ZyXEL Device blocks all IP Spoofing attempts 9 5 Stateful Inspection With stateful inspection fields of the packets are compared to packets that are already known to be trusted For example if you access some outside service the proxy server remembers things about your original request like the port number and source and destination addresses This remembering is called saving the state When the outside system responds to your request the firewall compares the received packets with the saved state to determine if they P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls are allowed in The ZyXEL Device uses stateful packet inspection to protect the private LAN from hackers and vandals on the Internet By default the ZyXEL Device s stateful inspection allows all communications to the Internet that originate from the LAN and blocks all traffic to the LAN that originates from the Internet In summary stateful inspection Allows all sessions originating from the LAN local network to the WAN Internet Denies all sessions originating from the WAN to the LAN Figure 85 Stateful Inspection eria saababa AP APAARARARA D EPA eanana saan a pananasn PR P y n odd xx ie
85. attack and the sets rules config display firewall set lt set gt This command shows the current configuration of a set including timeout values name default permit and etc If you don t put use a number after set information about all of the sets rules appears config display firewall set set 4 rule rule gt This command shows the current entries of a rule in a firewall rule set config display firewall attack This command shows all of the attack response settings config display firewall e mail This command shows all of the e mail settings config display firewall This command shows all of the available firewall sub commands P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix E Firewall Commands Table 136 Firewall Commands continued mail server lt ip address of mail server gt FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION Edit E mail config edit firewall e mail This command sets the IP address to which the e mail messages are sent config edit firewall e mail return addr lt e mail address gt This command sets the source e mail address of the firewall e mails config edit firewall e mail email to lt e mail address gt This command sets the e mail address to which the firewall e mails are sent config edit firewall e mail policy lt full hourly daily weekly gt This command sets how frequently the firewall l
86. between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other P 660HW Dx User s Guide 273 Appendix B Wireless LANs BS Figure 155 RTS CTS RTS Range CTS Range it ath O nn om pent RR ARI ER RR je ma aene P Maa Station AP me H iia k i H Data E Mr Pi Ce r m DC Ke EH NR Stations A and B do not FN 7 pee Station A gt hear each other They Station B m xm wm can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this f
87. code d The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack vulnerability ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 traceroute ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 Table 105 IPSec Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Discard REPLAY packet The router received and discarded a packet with an incorrect sequence number Inbound packet authentication failed The router received a packet that has been altered A third party may have altered or tampered with the packet Receive IPSec packet but no corresponding tunnel exists The router dropped an inbound packet for which SPI could not find a corresponding phase 2 SA P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 105 IPSec Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Rule lt d gt idle time out disconnect The router dropped a connection that had outbound traffic and no inbound traffic for a certain time period You can use the ipsec timer chk_conn Cl command to set the time period The default value is 2 minutes WAN IP changed to lt IP gt The router dropped all connections with the MyIP configured as 0 0 0 0 when the WAN IP address changed
88. erbe ena REPE ete b peak e n etaed va eka couse a cea alia 148 Table 5S Legal SN TP Soames basinan yd in Hae ME IERI HORS Eo ETHER ERI ERE EE HI aA 148 Tabie 36 Fre vak GENEA vr 159 Tables Firewall RUES n 160 TaD S8 Firewall Edit RUD 2 etie pet d rne o lebe bt Dr a M e cR dtd 163 U u esEUCueqecnEs pis Feo 164 Table 60 Firewall Configure Customized ServiGOS 1 eicaeiesscieei isset arnis 165 Table o1 Fredens SSH aunar eoa gba NOH aaa EE EXI LA a Da ania E ERAI eU UE aA SR E ae FERAS 169 Table 52 FirewalE ANI PODIO ii sspe MREpE S as SERES DEERHNN I e EP EN e PEr E PR RI sera EpPH Ip Re bn E d Pei tni M pais 172 Tabip Ds Frowa TREGSHON iss ens ca edging ta ca pr o Sosa veto ote E Maks age o a i Fal d o DR M 174 Table 64 Content Filter Keyword Tm 178 Table 65 Content Filter Schedule e 179 Table Ob Contem Filter THIS M T E 179 Tabl or SUE ROWO giiia ace co Ee 184 Table 69 Siate Route Edit c G R 185 Table 69 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example sssssse 188 Table 70 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example 125 opi dare bE CPI RnnEE FEY aa YE EPA AY AREE Ue d da eS Ep PEL ed eu E PEINT S SEE RES 189 Table 71 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example 190 Table 72 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example 190 Table 73 Bandw
89. filter netbios disp This command gives a read only list of the current NetBIOS filter modes for The ZyXEL Device NetBIOS Display Filter Settings Command Example NetBIOS Filter Status Between LAN and WAN Block IPSec Packets Forward Trigger Dial Disabled P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix NetBIOS Filter Commands The filter types and their default settings are as follows Table 148 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings NAME DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Between LAN This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded Block and WAN between the LAN and the WAN IPSec Packets This field displays whether NetBIOS packets sent through a VPN Forward connection are blocked or forwarded Trigger dial This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are allowed to initiate Disabled calls Disabled means that NetBIOS packets are blocked from initiating calls NetBIOS Filter Configuration Syntax sys filter netbios config type lt on off gt where type lt on off gt Example commands sys filter netbios config 0 on sys filter netbios config 3 on sys filter netbios config 4 off Identify which NetBIOS filter numbered 0 3 to configure 0 Between LAN and WAN 3 IPSec packet pass through 4 Trigger Dial For type 0 and 1 use on to enable the filter and block NetBIOS packets Use off to disable the filter and forward Net
90. fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter your ISP assigned IP address Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you use ENET address ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen First DNS Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP Server clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Second DNS As above Server Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 24 Internet Connection with PPPoA ffi Internet Configuration Please enter the User Name and Password given to you by your Internet Service Provider here User Name Password Li Note Device is automatically configured to obtain an IP address automatically The ISP will assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet lt Back Back Apply Bol Ed 1 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the login name that your ISP gives y
91. for DES causes the connection to fail Local remote IPs of incoming request conflict with rule lt d gt The security gateway is set to 0 0 0 0 and the router used the peer s Local Address as the router s Remote Address This information conflicted with static rule d thus the connection is not allowed Cannot resolve Secure Gateway Addr for rule d The router couldn t resolve the IP address from the domain name that was used for the secure gateway address Peer ID peer id My remote type My local type The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection vs My Remot My remote My remote The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection vs My Local My local My local The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection Send packet A packet was sent P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 106 IKE Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Recv packet IKE uses ISAKMP to transmit data Each ISAKMP packet contains many different types of payloads All of them show in the LOG Refer to RFC2408 ISAKMP for a list of all ISAKMP payload types Recv Mode Main or Aggressive request from IP The router received an IKE negotiation request from the peer address specified Send
92. hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the ZyXEL Device LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 3 4 Any IP BS Traditionally you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the ZyXEL Device to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the ZyXEL Device With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the ZyXEL Device allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the ZyXEL Devi
93. in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default ZyXEL Device IP address and click OK 3 Alogin screen displays Enter the default admin password 1234 Command Syntax The command keywords are in courier new font Enter the command keywords exactly as shown do not abbreviate The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets The symbol means or For example sys filter netbios config type onJoff means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off Command Usage A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Always type the full command Type exit to log out of the CLI when finished P 660HW Dx User s Guide 331 Appendix G Command Interpreter 332 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default LES Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allo
94. individual static route Active Select the check box to activate this static route Otherwise clear the check box Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Subnet Mask This is the IP subnet mask Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ZyXEL Device Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route 12 2 1 Static Route Edit Select a static route index number and click Edit gp The screen shown next appears Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Static Route Figure 103 Static Route Edit Static Route Setup Active Route Name a Destination IP Address foooo IP Subnet Mask poo00 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Static Route Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to ac
95. inni br RH Eo et bem od E E E det Eb dura 325 BE XLqcanPegsa pn u dem inun 327 Table 146 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control eeeeaeeeeseeseienee nennt ann tht eenuninenes 328 Table Dor Command EXOINDEGE is sites dust uence ata oaa dee rta t eU ea IDEE aia a SEE aa E Een NGA KL GM Dunt Unc 329 Table 146 NetBIOS Filter Default SGUINGS cL 340 P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART Introduction Introducing the ZyXEL Device 33 Introducing the Web Configurator 37 Introducing the ZyXEL Device This chapter introduces the main applications and features of the ZyXEL Device It also introduces the ways you can manage the ZyXEL Device 1 1 Overview The ZyXEL Device is an IEEE 802 11b g wireless ADSL2 gateway that allows super fast secure Internet access over analog POTS digital ISDN telephone lines depending on your model or by wireless In the ZyXEL Device product name H denotes an integrated 4 port switch hub and W denotes an included wireless LAN card that provides wireless connectivity See the Product Specifications appendix for a full list of features Model names ending in 1 for example P 660H HW D Series denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Model names ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network The DSL RJ 11 ADSL over POTS models or
96. need a chain of rules to filter a service Packet filtering only checks the header portion of an IP packet 9 7 1 1 When To Use Filtering To block allow LAN packets by their MAC addresses To block allow special IP packets which are neither TCP nor UDP nor ICMP packets To block allow both inbound WAN to LAN and outbound LAN to WAN traffic between the specific inside host network A and outside host network B If the filter blocks the traffic from A to B it also blocks the traffic from B to A Filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address To block allow IP trace route 9 7 2 Firewall The firewall inspects packet contents as well as their source and destination addresses Firewalls of this type employ an inspection module applicable to all protocols that understands data in the packet is intended for other layers from the network layer IP headers up to the application layer The firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into account the state of connections it handles so that for example a legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be blocked e The firewall uses session filtering i e smart rules that enhance the filtering process and control the network session rather than control individual pa
97. networks that are prone to interference 274 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble BES The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa
98. of addresses P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix E Firewall Commands Table 136 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall set set This command sets the rule to have the gt rule rule 4 destaddr ZyXEL Device check for traffic with this single ip address individual destination address config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL gt rule rule gt destaddr Device check for traffic with a particular subnet ip address subnet subnet destination defined by IP address and mask subnet mask config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL gt rule rule gt destaddr Device check for traffic going to this range of range start ip address end addresses ip address config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL 4 rule rule gt TCP destport Device check for TCP traffic with this single port 4 destination address You may repeat this command to enter various non consecutive port numbers config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL 4 rule rule gt TCP destport Device check for TCP traffic with a destination range start port gt end port portin this range gt config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the ZyXEL
99. of the MAC address P 660HW Dx User s Guide c Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 39 MAC Address Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless client that are allowed or denied access to Address the ZyXEL Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 6 WMM QoS WMM Wi Fi MultiMedia QoS Quality of Service allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WMM is a part of the IEEE 802 11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi Fi wireless networks 7 6 1 WMM QoS Example When WMM QoS is not enabled all traffic streams are given the same access throughput to the wireless network If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission demand that exceeds the current network capacity then the new traffic stream reduces the throughput of the other traffic streams When WMM QoOS is enabled the streams are prioritized according to the needs of the application You can assign different priorities to different applications This prevents reductions in data transmission for applications that are sensitive 7 6 2 WMM QoS Priorities The following table describe
100. of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 44 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 8 1 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address
101. only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT Click Edit to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the More Connections Advanced screen and edit more details of your WAN setup P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 6 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup To edit your ZyXEL Device s advanced WAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in the More Connections Edit screen The screen appears as shown Figure 44 More Connections Advanced Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast ATM Qos ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate RIP amp Multicast Setup Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size None v IGMP v2 CBR v 0 cell sec 0 cell sec cell Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 More Connections Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establis
102. override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Table 119 Wireless Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN The ZyXEL Device is fully compatible with both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g standards and can support both kinds of clients on the same network WEP Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy allows the encryption of data before its transmission over networks Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA is part of the IEEE 802 11i security specifications standard and offers user authentication and data encryption WPA2 WPA2 is an improvement on WPA with enhanced data encryption user authentication and key management WPA2 PSK WPA 2 PSK WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK allow you to implement the superior WPA and WPA2 encryption standards without using a RADIUS server Instead WPA 2 PSK uses pre shared keys PSKs to authenticate devices on the wireless network Output Power Management This allows you to alter the level of power used by the ZyXEL Device For example when access points are placed closely together power output levels may be reduced Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering This service checks the MAC address of a connection with a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses ensuring only wanted connections are allowed The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standar
103. packet filtering firewalls 143 Pairwise Master Key PMK 280 282 PCR 78 83 88 Peak Cell Rate see PCR Per Hop Behavior 194 PHB Per Hop Behavior 194 ping 257 ping of death 146 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 76 point to point protocol over ATM Point to Point Tunneling Protocol see PPTP POP3 134 145 power specifications 265 PPPoA 76 PPPoE 75 Benefits 75 PPTP 134 preamble mode 275 Priorities 122 priority 191 193 priority based scheduler 188 product registration 349 PSK 280 Q quick start guide 37 R RADIUS 276 message types 277 messages 277 shared secret key 277 RADIUS server 107 reboot 255 registration product 349 related documentation 3 remote management and NAT 204 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index remote management limitations 204 reset 255 reset button 40 resetting the ZyXEL device 40 restart 251 255 restore configuration 254 restore settings 254 RFC 1483 76 RFC 1631 129 RFC 1483 77 RFC 2364 76 RIP 96 Direction 96 Version 96 Routing Information Protocol see RIP RTS Request To Send 274 threshold 273 274 rules 158 checklist 156 key fields 157 LAN to WAN 158 logic 156 predefined services 169 S safety warnings 6 save settings 253 saving the state 148 scheduler 188 fairness based 189 priority based 188 SCR 79 83 88 screws 269 security general 152 ramifications 156 Server 132 server 131 132 230
104. security the ZyXEL Device is using Security Firewall This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Device s firewall is activated Content Filter This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Device s content filtering is activated System Status System Uptime This is the total time the ZyXEL Device has been on Current Date This field displays your ZyXEL Device s present date and time Time System Mode This displays whether the ZyXEL Device is functioning as a router or a bridge CPU Usage This number shows how many kilobytes of the heap memory the ZyXEL Device is using Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System and is thus available for running processes like NAT VPN and the firewall The bar displays what percent of the ZyXEL Device s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached Memory Usage This number shows the ZyXEL Device s total heap memory in kilobytes The bar displays what percent of the ZyXEL Device s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached Interface Status Interface This displays the ZyXEL Device port types Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping
105. service 157 service set 109 Service Set IDentity See SSID service type 165 services 134 settings backup 253 defaults 253 restore 254 setup general 227 Single User Account see SUA SIP ALG 132 SIP application layer gateway 132 SMTP 134 smurf 147 SNMP 134 207 manager 208 MIBs 209 source address 157 splitter 341 splitters 341 SPTGEN 315 command examples 329 text file format 315 SSID 105 hide 106 stateful inspection 143 144 148 149 and the ZyXEL device 150 process 149 static route 183 SUA 132 SUA vs NAT 132 subnet 267 301 subnet mask 95 163 302 subnetting 304 Sustain Cell Rate see SCR switch 265 SYN Flood 146 147 SYN ACK 146 syntax conventions 4 Syslog 168 System errors 233 system name 227 228 System Parameter Table Generator see SPTGEN System restart 255 System timeout 204 T TCP maximum incomplete 173 TCP security 150 TCP IP 145 146 285 TCP IP address 257 teardrop 146 Telnet 67 205 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index temperature 265 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 280 TFTP restrictions 204 three way handshake 146 threshold values 172 time and date settings 229 timeout 204 tools 251 traceroute 148 trademarks 347 traffic redirect 89 91 267 traffic shaping 78 transmission rates 33 triangle route 345 solutions 346 U UBR 83 88 UDP ICMP security 151 Unspecified Bit Rate see UBR UPnP 213 application 213 Forum 214 secu
106. te pa visi bcp c dtu tub adu bete ut Rep Edu Tr ere 156 jUWEL 28 e M 156 10 3 2 Security c TUI NN LU EEN EEE E TANNE 156 10 3 3 Key Fields For Configuring RUleS 2 uiis setdao ciet dott d dai dir dade 157 jure prep en nnn 157 TOAT LAN O WAN PRMD sas cece is ces csacciasseatec sp E A 158 Jur ue cr p 158 pueSt cai 5r do n t 158 135 Firewall Rules SUMMA gcenn nn e pete pE e ep c PPPRU Ire PERIDIN D ER EO NR PRTEDI QR POE O TN MRRHDN 159 10 6 1 Configuring Firewall FUSS auci pato ad i Dh Rea ta ada pet e do cba 161 10 6 2 Customized Services isa ven caste eduxi ibd EL addi Hp dad obuia tado lada tdi ine 164 10 6 3 Configuring a Customized Servie ccc ccssiccssaissieceseieunevtesrsguaiennatsusecnans sea cet id nuna 164 TOT Example Firewall Bleue ctr Rheni Hb E Ho PEDI a 165 5d s 0E pc qe T 169 pP DI M 171 10 10 DoS Tesholds E EE 172 AGI earn VOE a AEN Na 172 TOCTO 8 Aal Open DISSI socassa A ANAA 173 10 10 3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds iuis ccena kinda ehh Ada tta hh tak 173 Chapter 11 Content FIlferlhg cosan a e i SY ER ALRB Ta X d al ke Ti CD QUA VIS RE 177 111 Content Filtering OVE A 177 11 2 Configuring Keyword Blocking uusesccenekixo orent edt ronis nba bito n tr nnb kk 177 TLA esce Nerr II ETT 178 11 4 Configuring Trusted Computors sir tess wished Ba cvitusutune dade dodo OG RU LOCO HU
107. that the user requested Table 97 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Under SYN flood attack sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Exceed TCP MAX incomplete sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Note Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen Peer TCP state out of order sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order Note The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state Firewall session time out sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out The default timeout values are as follows ICMP idle timeout 3 minutes UDP idle timeout 3 minutes TCP connection three way handshaking timeout 270 seconds TCP FIN wait timeout 2 MSL Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header TCP idle established timeout s 150 minutes TCP reset timeout 10 seconds Exceed MAX incomplete sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections TCP and UDP exceeded the user configured threshold Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall
108. the appendix for more information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 20 Internet Connection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Obtain an IP Select this if you get a dynamic IP address from your Internet Service Provider Address ISP A dynamic IP address is not fixed your ISP assigns you a different one Automatically each time you connect to the Internet This option is not available if you select RFC 1483 in the Encapsulation field Static IP Address Select this if your ISP gave you a fixed IP address Enter the IP address you were given in the IP Address field IP Address If your ISP gave you an IP address to use enter it here Subnet Mask ENET ENCAP encapsulation only Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP address ENET ENCAP encapsulation only You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field Connection PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection
109. the firewall silently discards packets Drop discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Reject or allows the passage of packets Permit Schedule This field tells you whether a schedule is specified Yes or not No P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Table 57 Firewall Rules continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Log This field shows you whether a log is created when packets match this rule Yes or not No Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action Order Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field Type a number in the Move the rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 6 1 Configuring Firewall Rules Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information In the Rules screen select an index number and click Add or click a rule s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for in
110. the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 173 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General WY Ethernet Device General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO 4 Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address 3 Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide 297 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhep from the drop down list Ifyou have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Co Figure 174 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS File Profile Help 689 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may config
111. the present Firmware version and the date created Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it P 660HW Dx User s Guide 254 Chapter 19 Tools Table 113 Firmware Upgrade continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes D gt Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again Figure 140 Firmware Upload In Progress Firmware Upload In Progress Do not Turn Off the Device Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 141 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click
112. the settings in the Firewall General screen determine the action for this packet 4 Based on the obtained state information a firewall rule creates a temporary access list entry that is inserted at the beginning of the WAN interface s inbound extended access list This temporary access list entry is designed to permit inbound packets of the same connection as the outbound packet just inspected 5 The outbound packet is forwarded out through the interface P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls 6 Later an inbound packet reaches the interface This packet is part of the connection previously established with the outbound packet The inbound packet is evaluated against the inbound access list and is permitted because of the temporary access list entry previously created 7 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule and the connection s state table entry is updated as necessary Based on the updated state information the inbound extended access list temporary entries might be modified in order to permit only packets that are valid for the current state of the connection 8 Any additional inbound or outbound packets that belong to the connection are inspected to update the state table entry and to modify the temporary inbound access list entries as required and are forwarded through the interface 9 When the connection terminates or times out the connection s state table entry is deleted and the connection s temporary inbound acc
113. time this port has been up P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 7 Status Packet Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN Port Statistics Interface This field displays the type of port Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Poll Interval s Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above Stop Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics 2 4 7 Changing Login Password It is highly recommended that you periodically change the password for accessing the ZyXEL Device If you didn t change the default one after you logged in or you want to change to a new password again then click Maintenance gt System to display the screen shown next See Table 90 on page 228 for detailed field descriptions Figure 14 System General Syst
114. when you want your connection up all the time Connection The ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time Demand and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced Internet Connection Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup 5 5 1 Configuring Advanced Internet Connection Setup To edit your ZyXEL Device s advanced WAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Connection screen The screen appears as shown P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 41 Advanced Internet Connection Setup RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction None RIP Version fi j Multicast None ATM Qos ATM QoS Type cen Peak Cell Rate o cell sec Sustain Cell Rate o cell sec Maximum Burst Size o cell Zero Configuration No PPPoE Passthrough No T Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Internet Connection Setup
115. will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 16 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT 16 1 3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments P 660HW Dx User s Guide 213 Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages only on the LAN All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention You must have IIS Internet Information Services enabled on the
116. x Start IP io 0010 Address aun End IP io0015 Address i000 Subnet Mask o 0 0 0 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 15 9 Use the Add gt gt and Remove buttons between Available Services and Selected Services list boxes to configure it as follows Click Apply when you are done Custom services show up with an before their names in the Services list box and the Rules list box P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 94 Firewall Example Edit Rule Select Customized Services Edit Rule 2 M Active Source Address Address Type Any Address 7 Start IP o 0 0 0 Address End IP fo 0 0 0 Address Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Destination Address Address Type Range Address 7 Start IP ddrass 10 0 0 10 End IP Address 10 0 0 15 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Service Available Services AIMINEVY ICQ TCP 51 90 AUTH TCP 113 BGP TCP 179 EU Edit Customized Services Schedule Day to Apply iv Everyday M all day stard 0 hour Log minute Alert Action for Matched Packets Permit 7 Source Address List Destination Address List 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 15 Selected Services MyService TCP LIDP 123 Add gt gt Remove IV sun IV Mon IV Tue IV wed IV Thu M Fri V sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format End o hour minute Log Packet Detail Information I Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matche
117. you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization 276 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of R
118. 0 OK P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 180 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bceast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost P 660HW Dx User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house
119. 00 Packet Direction wan to LAN Create a new rule after rule number o x Add DTTETEDEEZUGADSTEIEM ERES Apply Cancel 3 Inthe Rules screen select the index number after that you want to add the rule For example if you select 6 your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 if there is one becomes rule 8 4 Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen 5 Inthe Edit Rule screen click the Edit Customized Services link to open the Customized Service screen 6 Click an index number to display the Customized Services Config screen and configure the screen as follows and click Apply Figure 92 Edit Custom Port Example Config Service Name MyService Service Type rcpiupP 7 Port Configuration Type Single C Port Range Port Number From 123 To 123 Back Apply Cancel Delete 7 Select Any in the Destination Address box and then click Delete 8 Configure the destination address screen as follows and click Add P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 93 Firewall Example Edit Rule Destination Address Edit Rule 1 M Active Action for Matched Packets Permit Source Address Source Address List Address Type any Address Start IP no0 Any Address uis Add End IP Te Address att Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Destination Address Destination Address List Address Type Range Address
120. 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www us zyxel com FTP ftp us zyxel com P 660HW Dx User s Guide 353 Appendix M Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420
121. 10102005 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Subnet 0 Mask 210102006 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Port 138 210102007 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 1 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210102008 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src IP address 0 0 0 0 210102009 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Subnet Mask 210102010 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Port 0 210102011 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 0 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210102013 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Act Match 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210102014 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Act Not Match lt 1 check 1 next 2 forward 3 drop gt Table 144 Menu 21 1 Filer Set 2 Menu 21 1 filter set 2 FIN FN PVA INPUT 210200001 Filter Set 2 Nam Str NetBIOS_WAN Menu 21 1 2 1 Filter set 2 rule 1 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 144 Menu 21 1 Filer Set 2 continued address FI F PVA INPUT 210201001 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Type 0 none 2 TCP E 2 IP 210201002 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt E 210201003 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Protocol 6 210201004 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest IP 0 0 0 0 address 210201005 IP Filter Set 2
122. 168 1 33 M ES cse LAN B 192 168 1 34 192 168 1 1 lt S i Internet gt 192 168 1 35 ee IP address D 192 168 1 36 assigned by ISP 8 6 Configuring Port Forwarding BS The Port Forwarding screen is available only when you select SUA Only in the NAT gt General screen BS If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Click Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen See Table 47 on page 134 for port numbers commonly used for particular services P 660HW Dx User s Guide 135 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Figure 77 NAT Port Forwarding Iv Port Forwarding Default Server Setup Default Server Port Forwarding Service Name Www active Service Name start Port End Port Server IP Address Modify 1 w 80 80 amp fo 0 0 0 Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Add ww 172 23 15 23 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 48 NAT Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Setup Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen If
123. 199 Connecting a Microfilter and Y Connector Y Connector Microfilter Phone Side P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix J Splitters and Microfilters ZyXEL Device With ISDN This section relates to people who use their ZyXEL Device with ADSL over ISDN digital telephone service only The following is an example installation for the ZyXEL Device with ISDN Figure 200 ZyXEL Device with ISDN p S he ISDN NT Ethernet Splitter 10 100BaseT ER ml ADSL P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix J Splitters and Microfilters P 660HW Dx User s Guide P 660HW Dx User s Guide Triangle Route The Ideal Setup When the firewall is on your ZyXEL Device acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet In an ideal network topology all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the ZyXEL Device to protect your LAN against attacks Figure 201 Ideal Setup WAN P SEE s A E Internet cs The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices Some companies have more than one route to one or more ISPs If the alternate gateway is on the LAN and it s IP address is in the same subnet the triangle route problem may occur The steps below describe the triangle route problem 1 Acomputer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a
124. 256 40000019 ISP incoming protocol filter set 4 256 40000020 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 1 256 40000021 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 2 256 40000022 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 3 256 40000023 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 4 256 40000024 ISP PPPOE idle timeout 0 40000025 Route IP lt 0 No 1 1 Yes gt 40000026 Bridge lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt 40000027 ATM QoS Type O CBR 1 ze UBR gt 40000028 Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 40000029 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 40000030 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 140 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continued 40000031 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 400000322 RIP Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 40000033 Nailed up Connection lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt Table 141 Menu 12 Menu 12 1 1 IP Static Route Setup FI F PVA INPUT 20101001 IP Static Route set 1 Name Str 120101002 IP Static Route set 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 20101003 IP Static Route set 1 Destination 0 0 0 0 IP address 20101004 IP Static Route set 1 Destination 0 IP subnetmask 20101005 IP Static Route set 1 Gateway 0 0 0 0 20101006 IP Static Rou
125. 3 4 Destination Address What is the connection s destination address is it on the LAN or WAN Is it a single IP a range of IPs or a subnet 10 4 Connection Direction This section describes examples for firewall rules for connections going from LAN to WAN and from WAN to LAN LAN to LAN Router and WAN to WAN Router rules apply to packets coming in on the associated interface LAN or WAN respectively LAN to LAN Router means policies for LAN to ZyXEL Device the policies for managing the ZyXEL Device through the LAN interface and policies for LAN to LAN the policies that control routing between two subnets on the LAN Similarly WAN to WAN Router polices apply in the same way to the WAN port P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration 10 4 1 LAN to WAN Rules The default rule for LAN to WAN traffic is that all users on the LAN are allowed non restricted access to the WAN When you configure a LAN to WAN rule you in essence want to limit some or all users from accessing certain services on the WAN WAN to LAN Rules The default rule for WAN to LAN traffic blocks all incoming connections WAN to LAN If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN you will need to create custom rules to allow it 10 4 2 Alerts Alerts are reports on events such as attacks that you may want to know about right away You can choose to generate an alert when a rule is matched in the Edit Rule screen see
126. 5 Follow the on screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup and save your configuration Figure 38 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete CONGRATULATIONS comp Press Finish button to close t d or click the following link to open other pages Return to Wizard Main Page Go to Advanced Setup page P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART II Network WAN Setup 75 LAN Setup 93 Wireless LAN 105 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 129 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 5 1 WAN Overview A WAN Wide Area Network is an outside connection to another network or the Internet 5 1 1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The ZyXEL Device supports the following methods 5 1 1 1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP is only implemented with the IP network protocol IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP Gateway field in the second wizard screen You can get this information from your ISP 5 1 1 2 PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol ov
127. 50000010 SUA Server 3 Port End 0 50000011 SUA Server 3 Local IP address 0 150000012 SUA Server 4 Active 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000013 SUA Server 4 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000014 SUA Server 4 Port Start 0 150000015 SUA Server 4 Port End 0 150000016 SUA Server 4 Local IP address 0 150000017 SUA Server 5 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000018 SUA Server 5 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000019 SUA Server 5 Port Start 0 150000020 SUA Server 5 Port End 0 150000021 SUA Server 5 Local IP address 0 150000022 SUA Server 6 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 0 50000023 SUA Server 6 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000024 SUA Server 6 Port Start 0 150000025 SUA Server 6 Port End 0 150000026 SUA Server 6 Local IP address 0 150000027 SUA Server 7 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000028 SUA Server 7 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000029 SUA Server 7 Port Start 0 150000030 SUA Server 7 Port End 0 150000031 SUA Server 7 Local IP address 0 150000032 SUA Server 8 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000033 SUA Server 8 Protocol X0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000034 SUA Server 8 Port Start 0 150000035 SUA Server 8 Port End 0 150000036 SUA Server 8 Local IP address 0 150000037 SUA Server 9 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 142 M
128. 7 System Table 90 System General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Old Password Type the default admin password 1234 or the existing password you use to access the system for configuring advanced features New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the ZyXEL Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 2 Time Setting To change your ZyXEL Device s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device s time based on your local time zone Figure 135 System Time Setting Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 00 36 06 Current Date 2000 01 01 Time and Date Setup C Manual New Time hh mm ss p 5o s New Date yyyy mm dd 000 Ry E Get from Time Server Time Protocol Daytime RFC 867 Time Server Address 0 0 0 0 Time Zone Setup IV Enable Daylight Savings Time Zone ewm Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London z Cancel Start Date First 7 Sunday x of January z 2000 01 02 at 0 o clock End Date First Sunday 7 of
129. 7810 21711 TCP P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 128 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 144 Cancel BES When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 129 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information 6 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 130 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status v T General Internet Gateway Status Duration Speed Activity Internet Internet Gateway w Packets Sent 8 Received 5 943 Connected 00 00 56 100 0 Mbps My Computer 16 4 2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first This comes helpful if you do not know the
130. 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix M Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1
131. ADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication
132. Applications cccccceecccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeensaneeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneesieeeeeeeess 34 Figure 2 LAN to LAN Application Example cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesensaaaaesaeeeeeeeeeeeseteeesieees 34 Figure 3 Front Panel ee 35 Figure s Password Otel 38 Fone Loy Sale OOE eee 38 Figure 6 Change Password at LOGIN e 39 Foure 7 Selec a Mode eT 39 Figur 8 Web Configurator Main Sereen spassccascadoircedeciannpoucciateiadcciaaronicdueadniauamiateloiacentoibocdmrtannemennnniawds 41 Fe NS SSO an E 44 Foue TO SOUS Any IP Table asasena erie Ei lop ctia seed AE C HIR UE MULA UR E EEEIEE RP VIR PAIR EERS 46 Figure TI Status WLAN SIUS e S SGR 46 Figure 12 Slots Bandwidth SUT ands EA 47 Figur 13 Status Packet Stasis cencnciiacnii anna E mee 48 Figure 14 System General Pee 49 d 343 59 5005 cC S 53 Foe TENA N ee ge rm 54 Figure 17 Auto Detection No DSL Connection 1155 2 ec sshd Mo tet o Ro d xad te Mou Aa cca ed RR UON 54 Figure 18 Auto Detection Failed 22e eorr aia ean e ePi ak pa n een En i Kp ERE RE dU eee 55 Figure 19 IB ei iMn cp 55 Figure 20 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters ccccccccceesseccccceeessececereesseceeeesseeceeeneeseeees 56 Figure 21 ihiemet Connection Witt PPPOE 25 c or
133. BIOS packets For type 3 use on to block NetBIOS packets from being sent through a VPN connection Use off to allow NetBIOS packets to be sent through a VPN connection For type 4 use on to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate dial backup calls Use off to block NetBIOS packets from initiating dial backup calls This command blocks LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN NetBIOS packets This command blocks IPSec NetBIOS packets This command stops NetBIOS commands from initiating calls P 660HW Dx User s Guide Splitters and Microfilters This appendix tells you how to install a POTS splitter or a telephone microfilter Connecting a POTS Splitter When you use the Full Rate Gdmt ADSL standard you can use a POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence as shown in the following figure Figure 197 Connecting a POTS Splitter Wall Jack POTS Splitter 1 Connect the side labeled Phone to your telephone 2 Connect the side labeled Modem or DSL to your ZyXEL Device 3 Connect the side labeled Line to the telephone wall jack Telephone Microfilters Telephone voice transmissions take place in t
134. Both the wireless clients and the access points must use the same WEP key Your ZyXEL Device allows you to configure up to four 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 59 Wireless Static WEP Encryption Wireless Setup IV Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz 7 Security Security Mode Static WEP WEP Key 12345 q Note The different WEP key lengths configure different strength security 40 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit respectively Your wireless client must match the security strength set on the router Please type exactly 5 13 or 29 characters or Please type exactly 10 26 or 58 characters using only the numbers 0 9 and the letters a f or A F Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 34 Wireless Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose Static WEP from the drop down list box Passphrase Enter a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and clicking Generate The ZyXEL Device automatically generates a WEP key WEP Key The WEP keys are used to encrypt data
135. Certificate CER REQ Certificate Request HASH Hash SIG Signature NONCE Nonce NOTFY Notification DE Delete VID Vendor ID P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs P 660HW Dx User s Guide Tools This chapter describes how to upload new firmware manage configuration and restart your ZyXEL Device 19 1 Firmware Upgrade Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension for example ZyXEL Device bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your device Click Maintenance gt Tools to open the Firmware screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device Figure 139 Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal device firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure Current Firmware Version V3 40 AGL 4 b2 11 20 2006 File Path Browse Upload The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 113 Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is
136. Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes CODE DESCRIPTION Algorithm mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints Key usage mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints Certificate was not valid in the time interval Not used Certificate is not valid Certificate signature was not verified correctly Certificate was revoked by a CRL Certificate was not added to the cache WO O nvNA an om wy nh Fr Certificate decoding failed Certificate was not found anywhere Certificate chain looped did not find trusted root Certificate contains critical extension that was not handled Certificate issuer was not valid CA specific information missing Not used CRL is too old CRL is not valid CRL signature was not verified correctly oO an oT Ww nh rI o CRL was not found anywhere Ne CRL was not added to the cache N Oo CRL decoding failed N mn CRL is not currently valid but in the future N N CRL contains duplicate serial numbers N Co Time interval is not continuous N A Time information not available N U Database method failed due to timeout N Oo Database method failed N NJ Path was not verified N Maximum path length reached Table 109 ACL Setting Notes
137. DTH CLASSES ALLOTMENTS PRIORITIES Actual outgoing bandwidth available on the interface 1000 kbps Root Class 1500 kbps same VoIP traffic Service SIP 500 Kbps High Be Speed SERI NetMeeting traffic Service H 323 500 kbps High FTP Service FTP 500 Kbps Medium If you use VoIP and NetMeeting at the same time the device allocates up to 500 Kbps of bandwidth to each of them before it allocates any bandwidth to FTP As a result FTP can only use bandwidth when VoIP and NetMeeting do not use all of their allocated bandwidth Suppose you try to browse the web too In this case VoIP NetMeeting and FTP all have higher priority so they get to use the bandwidth first You can only browse the web when VoIP NetMeeting and FTP do not use all 1000 Kbps of available bandwidth 13 8 Configuring Summary Click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT to open the screen as shown next Enable bandwidth management on an interface and set the maximum allowed bandwidth for that interface P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Figure 105 Bandwidth Management Summary Summary Summary BW Manager manages the bandwidth of traffic flowing out of the router on the specific interface BW Manager can be switched on off independently for each interface ea E A AA LAN ia 0 Priority d E F ves WAN rH 0 Priority Based F ves Cancel The following table describes the labels in this scree
138. Device applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface The ZyXEL Device does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the ZyXEL Device and be managed by bandwidth management The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to any interface must be less than or equal to the speed allocated to that interface in the Bandwidth Management gt Summary screen 13 2 Application based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications like VoIP Web FTP E mail and Video for example 13 3 Subnet based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets The following figure shows LAN subnets You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Figure 104 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example LAN A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 ews ze gt e Tn O 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 WAN m Internet gt 13 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application speci
139. Dx User s Guide Appendix L Legal Information 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Servic
140. E request for the listed rule request Rule d Receiving IKE IKE received an IKE request for the listed rule request Swap rule to rule d The router changed to using the listed rule Phase 1 key leng The listed rule s IKE phase 1 key length with the AES encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer phase 1 mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 did not match between the router and the peer phase 2 mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 2 did not match between the router and the peer Rule d mismatch Rule d Rule d Rule d mismatch Phase 2 key length The listed rule s IKE phase 2 key lengths with the AES encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer P 660HW Dx User s Gu ide Chapter 18 Logs Table 107 PKI Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Enrollment successful The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port Enrollment failed The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve lt SCEP CA server url gt The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s address cannot be resolved Enrollment successful The CMP online certi
141. ECESITA 192 168 1 33 00 00 E8 7C 14 80 E 192 168 1 35 00 AC 10 01 23 45 v 192 168 1 64 00 A0 C5 01 23 46 Iv E Apply Cancel Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 LAN Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address specified below The IP address should be within the range of IP addresses you specified in the DHCP Setup for the DHCP client MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN Add Click Add to add a static DHCP entry P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 29 LAN Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the static IP table entry row Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device Host Name This field displays the computer host name IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select the check box es in each entry to have the ZyXEL Device
142. EL DESCRIPTION System Monitor System up Time This is the elapsed time the system has been up Current Date Time This field displays your ZyXEL Device s present date and time CPU Usage This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization Memory Usage This field specifies the percentage of memory utilization WAN Port Statistics Link Status This is the status of your WAN link WAN IP Address This is the IP address of your WAN Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your ZyXEL Device Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your ZyXEL Device Node Link This field displays the remote node index number and link type Link types are PPPoA ENET RFC 1483 and PPPoE Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port Errors This field displays the number of error packets on this port Tx B s This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second Rx B s This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second Up Time This field displays the elapsed
143. EL Device automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the ZyXEL Device s Internet connection terminates Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup P 660HW Dx User s Guide LAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 6 1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses See Section 6 4 on page 98 to configure the LAN screens 6 1 1 LANs WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 48 LAN and WAN IP Addresses The interface to f the LAN is Ethernet i d N WAN N F Internet EMEN Theinterfaceto the Internetora E remote node is MemUEUH TEM d the DSL port P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 1 2 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can c
144. ERVICE DESCRIPTION WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 Telnet Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems Telnet uses TCP port 23 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION NetMeeting H 323 A multimedia communications product from Microsoft that enables groups to teleconference and videoconference over the Internet NetMeeting supports VoIP text chat sessions a whiteboard file transfers and applicat
145. EU s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported the SUA Only option in today s routers Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the ZyXEL Device maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload In Many to Many No Overload mode the ZyXEL Device maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Port numbers do NOT change for One to One and Many to Many No Overload NAT mapping types P 660HW Dx User s Guide 131 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens The following table summarizes these types Table 45 NAT Mapping Types TYPE IP MAPPING One to One ILA1 amp IGA1 Many to One SUA PAT ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 amp 2 IGA1 Many to Many Overload ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 Many to Many No Overload ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 gt IGA3 Server Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 8 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server The ZyXEL Device also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or server
146. FTP traffic H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service Select H 323 from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses H 323 Select User defined from the drop down list box if you do not want to use a predefined application for the bandwidth class When you select User defined you need to configure at least one of the following fields other than the Subnet Mask fields which you only enter if you also enter a corresponding destination or source IP address Destination Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Destination Subnet Netmask Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Destination Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination See Table 79 on page 197 for some common services and port numbers A blank destination IP address means any destination IP address Source Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Source Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Netmask Sourc
147. GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Turbo and Super G modes IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI 11 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G 992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DMT ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 2 G Lite ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 3 G dmt bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 3 Glite bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP Microsoft s implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol MBM v2 Media Bandwidth Management v2 RFC 2383 ST2 over ATM Protocol Specification UNI 3 1 Version TR 069 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management 1 363 5 Compliant AAL5 SAR Segmentation And Re assembly P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Sp
148. GUES HU bc OK nee 179 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 15 Table of Contents Part V Advanced tees 181 Chapter 12 cHupAICI cT 183 De nS RO rte 183 12 2 Contour Stc nial gt 2 osos mre ere iater butatenarbetacedea bcp ani butatena car trtrr bruta trate 183 jew Eri M ROC EIIE saiaren 184 Chapter 13 Bandwidth MANAG CINCH uiuis rin enc nada APA an ianiai ERO nan Po a ERA Ea arES IE riniki ii Ru aep Kaa 187 13 1 Bandwidth Management Overview eese eene nnnna enitn annua ninth anna anth anna nnn 187 13 2 Application based Bandwidth Management ssssssssssesseeeeeeenne 187 13 3 Subnet based Bandwidth Management esee enhn nnna ntt ta natn nn 187 13 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management sssssssssssss 188 jbsofec roe EET 188 13 5 1 Priority based Scheduler s issides eden epa tk end ea ad eh ask haad iaa 188 13 5 2 Faiross based Scheduler insucccssisescekees eee tetir secs tco pd seussetess dames AEn nE a 189 12 9 Maximize Bandwidth LISQUI icd rp DK RU I IRE IRURE FIOR AREE REROE ES REOR EELUR UE FEE EUR AED d 189 13 6 1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non Bandwidth Class Traffic ssssesssss 189 13 6 2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example 1 isis sinsin 189 13 6 3 Bandwidth Management Priorities seem 191 Tor Over Allot
149. IP pool 100 setup 94 IP protocol type 169 IP spoofing 146 148 ISDN 33 L LAN setup 93 LAN TCP IP 94 LAN to WAN rules 158 LAND 146 147 LEDs 35 local user database 106 and encryption 107 logs 233 alerts 233 configuring 234 descriptions 237 e mail 236 loopback test 258 MAC address 106 MAC address filter 106 action 121 MAC address filtering 121 MAC filter 121 maintenance 253 Management Information Base see MIB managing the device good habits 35 using FTP See FTP using Telnet See command interface P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index using the command interface See command interface maximize bandwidth usage 189 Maximum Burst Size see MBS max incomplete high 173 max incomplete low 173 MBS 79 83 88 media access control see MAC Message Integrity Check MIC 280 metric 78 MIB 208 microfilter 341 multicast 96 multiplexing 76 LLC based 76 VC based 76 multiprotocol encapsulation 76 N nailed up connection 77 NAT 95 129 134 135 308 address mapping rule 139 application 130 definitions 129 how it works 130 mapping types 131 mode 133 what it does 130 NAT traversal 213 navigating the web configurator 40 NetBIOS 339 commands 148 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Basic Input Output System see NetBIOS network disconnect icon 252 254 network management 134 NNTP 134 O one minute high 173 one minute low 173 P packet filtering 153 when to use 153
150. IR KIM AR UE ud R 105 Figure 57 Wireless LAN General M w 108 Fowe 59 Wireless NO SECUN ennt 110 Figure 59 Wireless Sanc WEF ENG On uter cnsicneiavaccisnnadcaciionaiedane nade ane 111 Figure 60 Wireless WPA PSKIWIAZ POK icccaiesseseacaasicuuss conse aust du muet Eo pl ddur a Era satsaaeeh nn SONi dinr serian Ean 112 Figure GT Wiroless WPAANPAZ Me p 114 FEO AN TOE aa T 116 FE So Sl a id animales aan eens 118 Figure 64 Example Wireless Client OTIST Screen eese esee nne en tnannaa n inth anna nth anna unn 119 Figure Go Security Re 119 igure SCOTT ii PIOUESS AP ronssar E AEA 119 Figure hy OTST in progress ClOn c RT 120 Figure 68 No AP with OTIST FOUNO P ia aaa 120 p fccrccgkfipolR Me ETT 120 ie TOMAC PUISSE FIBI meen eer ter Rett eer re eee uu canis ectvtu oue repo reenter nc vi bu ves Popp P nr La Re tree 121 2g FXREIIII o LAN COS 126 Figure 72 Application Priority Configuration 2asaxceeseccca ene cna nt sconce espace i ea bte Rieti dar ER td 127 Figure T9 How NUDO qw 130 Figure 74 MAT Application Veta AlaS 112 aet lan entia alea ED EXE io Le sem Ru YER Esta o dan 131 gU ELI EL Mec 133 Figure 76 Multiple Servers Behind NAT EXAmiple 22i nicer etre cusitescisaseinsevansandcenmatiaieonsenaaaaneceses 135 Foue T7 NAT PO Forwarding EN UU UT 136 Figure 79 Port Forwarding R
151. January 2000 01 02 at o o clock P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 System The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 91 System Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device Each time you reload this page the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device Each time you reload this page the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time hh mm ss configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date yyyy mm dd configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the ZyXEL Device get the time and date from the time server you specified below
152. MPER H 81 Table 21 Advanced Intermet Connection Setup 3121 5 xt rtr Ra rtt b oREM E E RER PRI ERE RAP Re sna d bebo Dea i IENA 83 Tade 2 2 i9 He odusstosiehiei santia ian Eaa 85 Tabe 23 More Olas vrac MENTRE T ners penn Spree EIOS HERR 86 Table 24 More Connections Advanced Setup sssssssssssssssssseeene nen eret nnne nnne 88 Tabe 2S WAN Backup SOID sariini 90 i5 cde d anaE NE AEE EEA 98 Table 2 Advanced LAN Setup e 99 Tabs 28 DHCP SOUP duisi rr ih ert vi ahs a e i DOR nando t a b a adds 100 jr cH PERI M 101 Er ULAN IP ARE mH 103 Table 31 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication sssssssssseee 107 Table as Wirelese LAN ene lal a5 bere ERI E PR PEERS E on D RD ErR M Mas xA UdeMM RE 109 Table 325 WYONG MO CUM ii sss der ord to REO RE RE a Or tc ER ER AP pk RU Rc SU 110 Table 34 Wireless Static WEP Encryption iussis ze esrb tob Let ha aUe ba n opa oda dc bp d ada 111 Table 35 Wireless WPA PSK AWPAZ PSRK iipisssctoiriubsesstire uid oe prr nisihi lutte hEr IUE rSn AA n Eai Eiaa ini 112 Table 38 Wireless UPDATE casssspeiestopAptH Hr aH b LER HITLER EIN HL Her eI E eo PER Ea ped e Medo 114 yr 8s MI cor o 116 Wate OE OUS T paien cero ru UU e VOX IDEE EXOA OUR FOUOI GT e FUDUA DOG DE DEEP ACA enone hud UV QS redone 118 P 660HW Dx User s Guide L
153. Mode Main or Aggressive request to IP The router started negotiation with the peer Invalid IP Peer local Peer local The peer s Local IP Address is invalid Remot IP Remot IP Remote IP conflicts The security gateway is set to 0 0 0 0 and the router used the peer s Local Address as the router s Remote Address This information conflicted with static rule d thus the connection is not allowed Phase 1 ID type mismatch This router s Peer ID Type is different from the peer IPSec router s Local ID Type Phase 1 ID content mismatch This router s Peer ID Content is different from the peer IPSec router s Local ID Content No known phase 1 ID type found The router could not find a known phase 1 ID in the connection attempt ID type mismatch Local Peer Local ID type Peer ID type The phase 1 ID types do not match ID content mismatch The phase 1 ID contents do not match Configured Peer ID Content Configured Peer ID Content The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the configured Peer ID Content is displayed Incoming ID Content XIncoming Peer ID Content The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the incoming packet s ID content is displayed Unsupported local ID Type td The phase 1 ID type is not supported by the router Build Phase 1 ID The router has started to build the phase
154. N go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the router See Appendix K on page 345 for more on triangle route topology and how to deal with this problem Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets LAN to LAN Router LAN to WAN WAN to WAN Router WAN to LAN Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply For example LAN to LAN Router means packets traveling from a computer subnet on the LAN to either another computer subnet on the LAN interface of the ZyXEL Device or the ZyXEL Device itself Default Action Use the drop down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet for a TCP packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message for a UDP packet to the sender Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets Log Select the check box to create a log when the above action is taken for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of your customized rules Expand Click this button to display more information Basic Click this button to display less information Apply Click Appl
155. Note This wizard can only automatically detect PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPP over ATM PPPoA or dynamically assigned Ethernet Internet connections Your Internet connection may use a Static IP address which cannot be detected automatically 3 2 1 Automatic Detection 1 If you have a PPPoE or PPPoA connection a screen displays prompting you to enter your Internet account information Enter the username password and or service name exactly as provided 2 Click Next Figure 19 Auto Detection PPPoE fiii Internet Configuration Connection Type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE ord given to you by your Internet vice Provider here If nter it in the third field User Name Password Service Name foptional 3 2 2 Manual Configuration 1 Ifthe ZyXEL Device fails to detect your DSL connection type enter the Internet access information given to you by your ISP exactly in the wizard screen If not given leave the fields set to the default P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 20 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters STEP STEP2 fii Internet Configuration your Intern j Your ISP may have etup letter efault if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account select Bridge mode Encapsulation t the encapsulation method used by your ISP Your ISP may list ENET ENCAP a ynamic IP Select the multiplexing type used by your ISP
156. P 660HW Dx 802 11g Wireless ADSL 2 4 port Gateway User s Guide Version 3 40 8 2007 Edition 2 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the ZyXEL Device e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw P 660HW Dx User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These
157. P encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods
158. RJ 45 ADSL over ISDN models connects to your ADSL enabled telephone line lt gt Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device The ZyXEL Device is the ideal high speed Internet access solution It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers and supports the ADSL standards as shown in Table 1 on page 34 In addition the ZyXEL Device with its wireless features allows wireless clients access to your wired network resources and to the Internet The ZyXEL Device provides protection from attacks by Internet hackers By default the firewall blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN The firewall supports TCP UDP inspection and DoS Denial of Services detection and prevention as well as real time alerts reports and logs A typical Internet access application is shown below P 660HW Dx User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device Figure 1 Protected Internet Access Applications N m m DSL mum am u LAN v qu VE Internet You can also use the ZyXEL Device to connect two geographically dispersed networks over the ADSL line A typical LAN to LAN application example is shown as follows Figure 2 LAN to LAN Application Example m LAN Al m a E Ey D Am ae a lm The ZyXEL Device is compatible with the ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2
159. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 166 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 167 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Genera
160. Rule 1 Dest 0 Subnet Mask 210201006 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest Port 137 210201007 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest Port lt 0 none 1 equal 1 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210201008 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src IP 0 0 0 0 address 210201009 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Subnet 0 Mask 210201010 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Port 0 210201011 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Port lt 0 none 1 equal 0 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210201013 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210201014 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Act Not lt 1 check 1 Match next 2 forward 3 drop gt Menu 21 1 2 2 Filter set 2 rule 2 FI F PVA INPUT 210202001 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Type lt 0 none 2 TCP L2 IP 210202002 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 210202003 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Protocol 6 210202004 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest IP 0 0 0 0 address 210202005 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest 0 Subnet Mask 210202006 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest Port 138 210202007 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest Port lt 0 none 1 equal 1 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210202008 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src IP 0 0 0 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 144 Menu 21 1 Filer Set 2 continued 210202009 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Subnet
161. SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM NEW_ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 24032 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 Net Meeting uses this protocol P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Table 61 Predefined Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IPSEC TRANSPORT TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service IPSEC_TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service
162. SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to Itself 7 Abrute force attack such as a Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the target network with useless data A Smurf hacker floods a router with Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request packets pings Since the destination IP address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request and response traffic If a hacker chooses to spoof the source IP address of the ICMP echo request packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all available bandwidth making communications impossible Figure 84 Smurf Attack Ping Responses Attacker broadcasts ping Every host on the packets with a spoofed source intermediary network address to every host on responds by sending the intermediary network responses to every host on the victim network P 660HW Dx User s Gui
163. Server Access lt 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100009 WEB Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Command Examples The following are example Internal SPTGEN screens associated with the ZyXEL Device s command interpreter commands Table 147 Command Examples FIN FN PVA INPUT ci command for annex a wan adsl opencmd FIN FN PVA INPUT 990000001 ADSL OPMD O glite 1 ti 413 3 12 gdmt 3 multim ode gt ci command for annex B wan adsl opencmd FIN FN PVA INPUT 990000001 ADSL OPMD lt 0 etsi 1 normal 3 2 gdmt 3 multimo de P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN P 660HW Dx User s Guide Command Interpreter The following describes how to use the command interpreter You can telnet to access the CLI Command Line Interface on the ZyXEL Device See the included disk or zyxel com for more detailed information on these commands lt gt Use of undocumented commands or misconfiguration can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable Accessing the CLI Use the following steps to telnet into your ZyXEL Device 1 Connect your computer to the ETHERNET port on the ZyXEL Device 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the ZyXEL Device IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually
164. Subnet Netmask nono Destination Port o Source Address poo Source Subnet Netmask pon Source Port 110 Protocol TCP m fe TOS Type of Service o 0 255 TOS Mask fo 0 255 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Configuration Active Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply this bandwidth management rule Enable a bandwidth management rule to give traffic that matches the rule priority over traffic that does not match the rule Enabling a bandwidth management rule also allows you to control the maximum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches the rule Rule Name Use the auto generated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters including spaces BW Budget Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual rule Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Use All Managed Select this option to allow a rule to borrow unused bandwidth on the interface Bandwidth Bandwidth borrowing is governed by the priority of the rules That is a rule with the highest priority is the first to borrow bandwidth Do not select this if you want to leave bandwidth available for other traffic types or if you want to restrict the
165. System Status Host Name System Uptime 0 02 23 Model Number P 660HW D1 Current Date Time 01 01 2000 00 12 08 MAC Address 00 13 49 09 12 14 System Mode Routing E ZyNOS Firmware Version HN Vs b3 CPU Usage 2 71 12122006 Memory Usage NENNEN i e DSL Firmware Version TI AR 07 00 04 00 WAN Information DSL Mode NORMAL IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 interface status rae ui Fir n 9 35 DSL Down 0 kbps 0 kbps IP Address 192 168 1 1 LAN 1 Up 100M Full Duplex IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 LAN 2 DHCP Server WLAN Information LAN 3 SSID ZyXEL Channel 6 PANIS Security WPA PSK WLAN Active 125M G Security Firewall Enabled Content Filter Disable Summary AnyIP Table Bandwidth Status WLAN Status Packet Statistics The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics Apply Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes M
166. Table Br es TP Address l NAC Address Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Status Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address of the network device MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed IP address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen 2 4 4 Status WLAN Status Click the WLAN Status hyperlink in the Status screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device Figure 11 Status WLAN Status Wireless LAN Association List ELE Refresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status WLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address _ This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of an associated wireless station eos This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the ZyXEL Device me Refresh Click Refresh to reload this screen
167. Table 106 IKE Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Active connection allowed exceeded The IKE process for a new connection failed because the limit of simultaneous phase 2 SAs has been reached Start Phase 2 Quick Mode Phase 2 Quick Mode has started Verifying Remote ID failed The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer s Local Remote Addresses don t match Verifying Local ID failed The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer s Local Remote Addresses don t match IKE Packet Retransmit The router retransmitted the last packet sent because there was no response from the peer Failed to send IKE Packet An Ethernet error stopped the router from sending IKE packets Too many errors Deleting SA An SA was deleted because there were too many errors Phase 1 IKE SA process done The phase 1 IKE SA process has been completed Duplicate requests with the same cookie The router received multiple requests from the same peer while still processing the first IKE packet from the peer IKE Negotiation is in process The router has already started negotiating with the peer for the connection but the IKE process has not finished yet No proposal chosen Phase 1 or phase 2 parameters don t match Please check all protocols settings Ex One device being configured for 3DES and the other being configured
168. The metric sets the priority for the ZyXEL Device s routes to the Internet If any two of the default routes have the same metric the ZyXEL Device uses the following pre defined priorities Normal route designated by the ISP see Section 5 5 on page 80 Traffic redirect route see Section 5 7 on page 89 WAN backup route also called dial backup see Section 5 8 on page 89 For example if the normal route has a metric of 1 and the traffic redirect route has a metric of 2 and dial backup route has a metric of 3 then the normal route acts as the primary default route If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet the ZyXEL Device tries the traffic redirect route next In the same manner the ZyXEL Device uses the dial backup route if the traffic redirect route also fails If you want the dial backup route to take first priority over the traffic redirect route or even the normal route all you need to do is set the dial backup route s metric to 1 and the others to 2 or greater IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above 5 3 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate
169. W Dx User s Guide 317 Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Example Internal SPTGEN Menus This section provides example Internal SPTGEN menus Table 137 Abbre viations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table ABBREVIATION MEANING FIN Field Identification Number FN Field Name PVA Parameter Values Allowed INPUT An example of what you may enter Applies to the ZyXEL Device Table 138 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup EL FN PVA INPUT 10000000 Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 10000001 System Name lt Str gt Your Device 10000002 Location lt Str gt 10000003 Contact Person s Name lt Str gt 10000004 Route IP lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000006 Bridge lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Table 139 Menu 3 Menu 3 1 General Ethernet Setup FIN E PVA INPUT 30100001 Input Protocol filters Set 1 2 30100002 Input Protocol filters Set 2 256 30100003 Input Protocol filters Set 3 256 30100004 Input Protocol filters Set 4 256 30100005 Input device filters Set 1 256 30100006 Input device filters Set 2 256 30100007 Input device filters Set 3 256 30100008 Input device filters Set 4 256 30100009 Output protocol filters Set 1 256 30100010 Output protocol filters Set 2 256 30100011 Outp
170. When these fragments are reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot 6 Weaknesses in the TCP IP specification leave it open to SYN Flood and LAND attacks These attacks are executed during the handshake that initiates a communication session between two applications Figure 82 Three Way Handshake Client Server ACK E pe Under normal circumstances the application that initiates a session sends a SYN synchronize packet to the receiving server The receiver sends back an ACK acknowledgment packet and its own SYN and then the initiator responds with an ACK acknowledgment After this handshake a connection is established SYN Attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN ACK response While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN ACK it queues up all outstanding SYN ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue SYN ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer which is set at relatively long intervals terminates the three way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls Figure 83 SYN Flood Client Server SYN SYN SYN SYN SYN ACK SYN ACK SYN ACK SYN ACK Ina LAND Attack hackers flood
171. Windows web server for UPnP to work 16 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports IGD 1 0 Internet Gateway Device See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP 16 2 1 Configuring UPnP Click Advanced gt UPnP to display the screen shown next See Section 16 1 on page 213 for more information Figure 119 Configuring UPnP UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL P 660HW D1 Internet Sharing Gateway Active the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall Note For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 89 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active the Universal Plug Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could and Play UPnP Feature use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to configuration changes automatically configure the ZyXEL Device so that they can through UPnP communicate t
172. Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard WPA2 IEEE 802 111 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 279 Appendix B Wireless LANs Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counte
173. a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting Ethernet port connections can be in half duplex or full duplex mode Full duplex refers to a device s ability to send and receive simultaneously while half duplex indicates that traffic can flow in only one direction at a time The Ethernet port must use the same speed or duplex mode setting as the peer Ethernet port in order to connect For the WAN port it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate Summary Any IP Table Use this screen to view a list of IP addresses and MAC addresses of computers which are not in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device WLAN Status This screen displays the MAC address es of the wireless stations that are Wireless devices currently associating with the ZyXEL Device only Bandwidth Status Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device s bandwidth usage and allotments Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 4 3 Status Any IP Table Click the Any IP Table hyperlink in the Status screen The Any IP table shows current read only information including the IP address and the MAC address of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the ZyXEL Device Figure 10 Status Any IP Table AnyIP
174. al access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP 5 1 1 4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information 5 1 2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP 5 1 2 1 VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 5 1 2 2 LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 5 1 3 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios For Internet access you
175. allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end local IP address ILA If your rule is for all local IP addresses then enter 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to One and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Server mapping types Server Mapping Only available when Type is set to Server Set Select a number from the drop down menu to choose a server mapping set Edit Details Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART IV Security Firewalls 143 Firewall Configuration 155 Content Filtering 177 Firewalls This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and introduces the ZyXEL Device firewall
176. alls to a remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection When you use the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access you are configuring the first WAN connection Click Network gt WAN gt More Connections to display the screen as shown next Figure 42 More Connections More Connections Iv oN O cn BR Ww ON DICEN Le MCITIT CNN RT RR Internet Connection 8 35 EMET ENCAP test 0 33 PPPoA EP Gu Apply Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 More Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of a connection Active This display whether this connection is activated Clear the check box to disable the connection Select the check box to enable it Name This is the descriptive name for this connection VPI VCI This is the VPI and VCI values used for this connection Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used for this connection Modify The first ISP connection is read only in this screen Use the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to edit it Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the connection Click the delete icon to remove an existing connection You cannot remove the first connection Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
177. anced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 7 3 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any data encryption ES If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 58 Wireless No Security Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz Security Security Mode No Security Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Wireless No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup 7 3 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless clients and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network
178. and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roamin
179. andwidth When you enable maximize bandwidth usage the ZyXEL Device first makes sure that each bandwidth class gets up to its bandwidth allotment Next the ZyXEL Device divides up an interface s available bandwidth bandwidth that is unbudgeted or unused by the classes depending on how many bandwidth classes require more bandwidth and on their priority levels When only one class requires more bandwidth the ZyXEL Device gives extra bandwidth to that class When multiple classes require more bandwidth the ZyXEL Device gives the highest priority classes the available bandwidth first as much as they require if there is enough available bandwidth and then to lower priority classes if there is still bandwidth available The ZyXEL Device distributes the available bandwidth equally among classes with the same priority level 13 6 1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non Bandwidth Class Traffic Do the following three steps to configure the ZyXEL Device to allow bandwidth for traffic that is not defined in a bandwidth filter 1 Leave some of the interface s bandwidth unbudgeted 2 Do not enable the interface s Maximize Bandwidth Usage option 3 Do not enable bandwidth borrowing on the child classes that have the root class as their parent see Section 13 9 on page 192 13 6 2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example Here is an example of a ZyXEL Device that has maximize bandwidth usage enabled on an interface The following table shows each bandwidth cla
180. andwidth Management Wizard General Information LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the Active check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply bandwidth management to traffic going out through the ZyXEL Device s port s Select Services Setup to allocate bandwidth based on the service requirements Back Click Back to display the previous screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide 69 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Table 18 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 Use the second wizard screen to select the services that you want to apply bandwidth management and select the priorities that you want to apply to the services listed Figure 37 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration fli Service Configuration In the box belo an allocate bandwidth based on the applications and se s important to you Check t ct ox for each application you use and change the prior etting to match your individual ne a ae WWW C High C Mid Low FTP C High mid C Low E Mail C High Mid C Low Telnet C High C Mid Low NetMeeting H 323 C High C Mid Low VoIP SIP High C Mid C Low VoIP H 323 C High C Mid Low m jm m jim f TFTP C High C Mid Low Hsae High Mid or Low to priaritize the bandwidth for each service
181. are Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device s configuration You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert your public IP address es to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 IP Alias IP alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each subnet Time and Date Get t
182. are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BES Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The P 660HW Dx may be referred to as the ZyXEL Device the device or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 660HW Dx User s Guide Document Conv
183. aries depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen Fill in the field if available and click Next 3 3 1 Manually assign a WPA PSK key Choose Manually assign a WPA PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 30 Manually assign a WPA key fa Wireless LAN Pre Shared Key 12345678 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Manually assign a WPA key LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters You can set up the most secure Key wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 3 2 Manually assign a WEP key Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 31 Manually assign a WEP key STEP b gt STEP 2 a Wireless LAN 9 and the letters a f or YEP ke ti nfigu ferent rity bit bit or 256 bit Your wi nt must match th On the last page of the Wireless Setup wizard you will have a chance write down this key and your network settings for safekeeping The following table describes the labels in this screen
184. asoniabouerteedaciuetaswuniuetesete 303 Table 128 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation cccccccccceeeceseeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesenes 303 Table 123 SIDE T usasiolvue ii din te ea ian tls bebat Me nunt 305 D EN Ne y T 306 Hs m caeci NOTTE T TT UNNmeE TN 306 Table 132 SD A sssuibxqureidenitidndur Wm aquiricM MPH UU Meg aU 306 TOOT EU Ue c M T 306 Table 134 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning seseeee enm een 307 Table 135 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning icieeessiseeieeeiiseeeteee titt etnia 307 Tabe T36 Fire Commands uuiudieci set padre Ra ERO PIX DRE FRI LEE LO ER ERR PEE o RH ad 309 Table 137 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table 318 Table 1358 Menu 1 General Setup usoiuasener rien testes sv reniri e Era L bv Phat AE ro okii a KERN UD Lope bd NR ED 318 Tae TOR PIGH AE Zunsalbastcumenendiutibpxeeburt con ate oni pe cuf epe Iu Establece uci ap vues 318 Table 140 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup 1e rete Rr toa aa ERE nho LXR EEREHEPAYgR RERO S dana bane aa Ene AiE 320 U TAT IUD A 322 Table 142 Menu 15 SUA Server SOL x cucpnaii rtr pP rr EREERER deben d i e EUER PERRA DPA kE Eaa Sanaa CER RE Eq RE 322 Table 123 Menu 21 1 FMLeESBERT iuuusesencesie Giai bi ois aceesrccesd dovaaghoo eatin AUIE Een I dI vEVEL RU oV dis een ES 324 Table 144 Menu 21T Fir Sel SS LL o
185. be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server optional IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the ZyXEL Device The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your ZyXEL Device The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WLAN setup To configure advanc 7 3 5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup ed wireless settings click the Advanced Setup button in the General screen The screen appears as shown P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 62 Advanced Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2432 0 2432 Fragmentation Threshold 2432 256 2432 Output Power Preamble Long 7 802 11 Mode Mi
186. cati n evel Firewalls 15 ener tham PERI een i EIER Re EVE Re rhe e epa uk nn el en 144 MASS rice edil e 144 9 2 Iatredquctior To ZYAECS Firewall iiie Rr ES oL RI ER NL RID S LS dS 144 9 3 1 Denial of Service ANAK aranana H D Egi ERST oR ee ete 145 94 Denial Ol Service Rt 145 SE E med e mc ERE A A E EIIN EA T I EOI aes EEEN ETT 145 e Teo DOS AA c Re UR 146 95 Statai SCC sesno A EEA N 148 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 9 5 1 State tl nspectan PIODOSS 122 devi PR PEE PD RE ee FIRES EN E aep von LABOR OA 149 9 5 2 Stateful Inspection and the ZyXEL Device eeseeeseeeseeeeeen nnn nn ntn nan nenas 150 Odes TOP SECU dee 150 954 LIDET IMP SSECUBD ccc ii ert ALB Id sen Fade c a a ird aac of Eta o LR e UR 151 8 5 5 Upper Layer PrOISCBIB ciscastue ficuc eru na te Pre Hte tom ilu uu abr EE M ERR FU T e briU s 151 9 6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall eene 152 SOL SOUT E e i ETT URS 152 27 Packs Fillanno ve TAOWell srice 153 BT packet FAUGBURE a sss stra adr das ai Dos pee UU no aan ae oa aoa dat on aOR ES 153 Baz FrN al Meech eee Pec en nese ree Corr pce near tr eC rC ES a a a pU cete oes 153 Chapter 10 aliii T 155 10 1 Access Dio M 155 10 2 Firewall Policies OVODVIIBW 1 caedis en x Expo npn ta Eod a D E pana Ka a Ke ntc i 155 To Bale Lodi OO EW cota ada Cente ore are Ane oma atta de
187. ce Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management 13 10 DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 13 10 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior 13 10 2 DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 107 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bit Unused 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior
188. ce and access the Internet The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a ZyXEL Device is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet Figure 49 Any IP Example P Ts N TN P E3 Internet 192 168 10 1 m e Ss e Internet 192 168 10 1 192 168 1 1 j The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device s IP address You must enable NAT SUA to use the Any IP feature on the ZyXEL Device 6 3 4 1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the ZyXEL Device to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its specified destination P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following lists out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the ZyXEL Device 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access t
189. ch IP address es users can send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device ICMP Use this screen to change your anti probing settings UPnP Use this screen to enable UPnP on the ZyXEL Device Maintenance System General This screen contains administrative and system related information and also allows you to change your password Time Setting Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your ZyXEL Device Restart This screen allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off Diagnostic General These screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device general connection DSL Line These screens display information to help you identify problems with the DSL line 2 4 2 Status Screen The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen Some fields or links are not available if you entered the user password in the login password screen see Figure 5 on page 38 Not all fields are available on all models P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 9 Status Screen Device Information
190. cipesessetete ee dani bl duni bula ARA ER Td SR Epub eq ado EDU PARA EIS T27 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Leeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 129 Sg MAL Fe iit OVON game ee ost a Dee e on ba dem iE Ea E t pdt 129 GNE UNES DUST E E E 129 mex coria INE e M ren 130 CR dirlo gm T 130 BL MAT ABPIIPIUDI e ocio e eto a eti P n EPRa P EF P Heke NOR Iq ME EN DM blu ut NU DER 130 8 1 5 NAT Mapping TYPES reiinido a iai uri e ITEM Let E EUER 131 8 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT assesses siesta anat tha ad 4a ERR 44A taa 132 Merci c ER 132 GANAT Conard Ee o PER IERI 133 OS POFO rr NN m UT TT 133 8 5 1 Default Server IP Address iussu essi eo one rhbv UNE Fe ino aiaa een ido kb PU E ond 134 8 5 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers eese nnne 134 8 5 3 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example ssesesss 135 6 6 CONTQUIING POR FPORWENOING e ise inno nnna ea ERSE M 135 6 6 1 Port F rwarding Rule Edit TT 136 BF Address arent ETE 137 B 7 1 Address Mapping Rule Edit scarier n big an 139 Pan N S6C aaee E 141 Chapter 9 lici 143 Na 2 IVE NUTUS 143 22 a at 0 Bem ace aiee eeee 143 9 2 1 Packet Fitornng Iie welll 5c ox ssa len da acon Dau Ho Rx eco diesen Ld ua an Dec wes 143 9 2 2 Appli
191. ckets in a session The firewall provides e mail service to notify you of routine reports and when alerts occur 9 7 2 1 When To Use The Firewall To prevent DoS attacks and prevent hackers cracking your network Arange of source and destination IP addresses as well as port numbers can be specified within one firewall rule making the firewall a better choice when complex rules are required P 660HW Dx User s Guide 153 Chapter 9 Firewalls To selectively block allow inbound or outbound traffic between inside host networks and outside host networks Remember that filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address The firewall performs better than filtering if you need to check many rules Use the firewall if you need routine e mail reports about your system or need to be alerted when attacks occur The firewall can block specific URL traffic that might occur in the future The URL can be saved in an Access Control List ACL database P 660HW Dx User s Guide Firewall Configuration This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the ZyXEL Device firewall 10 1 Access Methods The web configurator is by far the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your ZyXEL Device has to offer For this reason it is recommended that you configure your firewall using the web configurator CLI Command Line Interpreter commands provide limited configuration option
192. com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz P 660HW Dx User s Guide 351 Appendix M Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909
193. ction Select the direction of traffic to which you want to apply bandwidth management Service Select a service for your rule or you can select User Defined to go to the screen where you can define your own Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Bandwidth kbps Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual rule Add Click this button to add a rule to the following table This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Active This displays whether the rule is enabled Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device apply this bandwidth management rule Enable a bandwidth management rule to give traffic that matches the rule priority over traffic that does not match the rule Enabling a bandwidth management rule also allows you to control the maximum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches the rule Rule Name This is the name of the rule Destination Port This is the port number of the destination O means any destination port Priority This is the priority of this rule Bandwidth kbps This is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Devi
194. ction and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so old rules 5 6 and 7 become new rules 4 5 and 6 To change your ZyXEL Device s address mapping settings click Network gt NAT gt Address Mapping to open the following screen Figure 79 Address Mapping Rules wow nn amp WN o Address Mapping Address Mapping Rules LocalStartip Localendip GlobalStartip Global nd IP Type Modify 1 A z z E 3 Gd UU UU Ud C GA UA E E E E E E E E E ED The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 50 Address Mapping Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP ad
195. d Delete the Oldest Half Open Session when New Connection Request Comes C Deny New Connection Request for fi Minutes 1 255 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Firewall Threshold LABEL DESCRIPTION DEFAULT VALUES Denial of Service Thresholds One Minute Low This is the rate of new half open sessions 80 existing half open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half open sessions The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half open sessions as necessary until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number One Minute High This is the rate of new half open sessions 100 half open sessions per that causes the firewall to start deleting half minute The above numbers cause open sessions When the rate of new the ZyXEL Device to start deleting connection attempts rises above this number half open sessions when more the ZyXEL Device deletes half open sessions than 100 session establishment as required to accommodate new connection attempts have been detected in attempts the last minute and to stop deleting half open sessions when fewer than 80 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute Maximum This is the number of existing half open 80 existing half open sessions Incomplete Low sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half open sessions The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half o
196. d a Cancel On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule the Rules screen should look like the following Rule 1 allows a MyService connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10 0 0 10 through 10 0 0 15 on the LAN P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 95 Firewall Example Rules MyService o aM Rules oxi Packet Direction Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 395 Create a new rule after rule number IE 7 Add Pcie oerinaone service peuonfoenesmeftorf roai forter 1 any 100010 100 015 myService TCPAIDP 123 Permit No No amp iif bN 100 waN to LAN Apply Cancel 10 8 Predefined Services The Available Services list box in the Edit Rule screen see Section 10 6 1 on page 161 displays all predefined services that the ZyXEL Device already supports Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the default configuration labeled DNS UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 Up to 128 entries are supported Custom service ports may also be configured using the Edit Customized Services function discussed previously Table 61 Predefined Services
197. d TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF U The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF land attack land ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP land attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 ip spoofing WAN TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port ip spoofing WAN ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 icmp echo ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 syn flood TCP The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack ports scan TCP The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack teardrop TCP The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack teardrop UDP The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack teardrop ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack For type and code details see Table 110 on page 248 illegal command TCP The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack NetBIOS TCP The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack ip spoofing no routing entry TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack ip spoofing no routing entry ICMP type d
198. de Chapter 9 Firewalls 9 4 2 1 ICMP Vulnerability ICMP is an error reporting protocol that works in concert with IP The following ICMP types trigger an alert Table 53 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts 5 REDIRECT 13 TIMESTAMP REQUEST 14 TIMESTAMP REPLY 17 ADDRESS MASK REQUEST 18 ADDRESS MASK REPLY 9 4 2 2 Illegal Commands NetBIOS and SMTP The only legal NetBIOS commands are the following all others are illegal Table 54 Legal NetBIOS Commands MESSAGE REQUEST POSITIVE VE RETARGET KEEPALIVE All SMTP commands are illegal except for those displayed in the following tables Table 55 Legal SMTP Commands AUTH DATA EHLO ETRN EXPN HELO HELP MAIL NOOP QUIT RCPT RSET SAML SEND SOML TURN VRFY 9 4 2 3 Traceroute Traceroute is a utility used to determine the path a packet takes between two endpoints Sometimes when a packet filter firewall is configured incorrectly an attacker can traceroute the firewall gaining knowledge of the network topology inside the firewall Often many DoS attacks also employ a technique known as IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing may be used to break into systems to hide the hacker s identity or to magnify the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking that the communications
199. de 298 Figure 176 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO ssssssss 299 Figure 177 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO ssssseeeees 299 Figure 178 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf uiuuscecesesseese ctio re ttt pope t tt ne potu eorr Ltda Erud 299 Figure 179 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethemet Card eosesiiscti stain x ott Mad EV FOE ESAE E RI 4 SR 299 Figure 190 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TGP IP Properties Lnuussueeste Cb iac e Rp Et ela debeat rM IEEE epa 300 Figure 181 Network Number and Host ID uiui esee orideut e tradu sopa due pet ddl parado nur boat gous sessadadurvente 302 Figure 182 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting eeeeeesseeeeessenne enitn nnn ninh nana nnn 304 Figure 183 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 2ueceeteteen taspi eese open qREKEH ted va Er pee aei HEX Nes cH HEX VER RERUHUR 305 Figure 184 Configuration Text File Format Column Descriptions sesseeeeesee 315 Figure 185 Invalid Parameter Entered Command Line Example 1 antt 316 Figure 186 Valid Parameter Entered Command Line Example 1 oiii kcase ettet nevinii 316 Figure 187 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example c rtt entre aea edendo 317 Figure 188 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example issctcssssccasassssesccassasonesdeaessaannescasaseosecseasanssuananchiooes 317 Figure 189 Pop up BOOKET T Ems 333 Figuic T20 Ipterme
200. detaniut cdeudnaddesantaihoiavauseotennsticuaseasensesiaiai 31 rane CIS His Cy EL DOVE ausosoceski ax GUAPO GUY RR ASVIERHOU ERU AE AA RO UR LR Un GG OR ORG I 33 introducing TNS Web Gong lE uou t i e dina E CHIP ILE EE pur ex ERE FI Pi Dina aiT KRAADE ENAA EEA KRENA 37 iiie jc E S E A P ES E E TR TORTE A ATS 51 Wizard Setup Tor Internet ACCESS niiina unnandi e anre mak Ln RR anaiai naana anad Lan dU a una 53 Bandwidth Management Wizard ccicccsccccivessusceesis isset cimi retasa cos estos acted abes sce ESANA Ean aa 67 i1 e 73 WAN BOUNDS m M 75 LOOPS eni ee vbt Me ates o ed 93 TEOS LAN ES 105 Network Address Translation NAT Screens ssessseesssseseesrsesrrrsssserrnrreersnasestssssadrtrnassteernaaas 129 SECHS ununi dii ree ce eee torr er NM MN RM renee er eee ee eee uM ERN NN err 141 iri em 143 Firewall CODD EDD csi ssn dad Epod dba ede Pu pi dba bb ur cp pagent clade Bad ida da 155 en naducihs M 177 Pip E E A A E E A E E E 181 ipd d A E N AA A E E E 183 Bandaidin Manage Iri esI 187 DME DN o SE I ge ec 199 Remote Management ConfiguratiO cc cccccccscccsstccnvssssiccesssasrceecs iensen En E E aaa 203 Universal Plug and Play CDEBE ps icccaden idan dtccnomanise e Fork d thoi aba ennen EEn i ix xo ada e EENEN EEREN 213 Maintenance and Troubleshooting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
201. dress This field is N A for One to one and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for Many to One and Server mapping types Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is N A for One to one Many to One and Server mapping types P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Table 50 Address Mapping Rules continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type 1 1 One to one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type M 1 Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only M M Ov Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses MM No No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note
202. dress is not fixed your ISP assigns you a different one Automatically each time you connect to the Internet This option is not available if you select RFC 1483 in the Encapsulation field Static IP Address Select this if your ISP gave you a fixed IP address Enter the IP address you were given in the IP Address field IP Address If your ISP gave you an IP address to use enter it here Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP address Specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP Connection Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time Connection The ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time Demand and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout NAT NAT is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network None Select None to disable NAT SUA Only SUA only is available
203. ds supported in the ZyXEL Device Table 120 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 267 Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 120 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 PPP over ATM over ADSL RFC 2408 Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol ISAKMP RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz
204. e Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service SNMP Configuration Get Community Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Set Community Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests TrapCommunity Type the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The default is public and allows all requests TrapDestination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 8 Configuring DNS Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Refer to the chapter on LAN for background information To change your ZyXEL Device s DNS settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt DNS The screen appears as shown Use this screen to set from which IP address the ZyXEL Device will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your ZyXEL Device s DNS settings P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration Figure 117 Rem
205. e Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting A blank source port means any source port number Source Port Enter the port number of the source See Table 79 on page 197 for some common services and port numbers Protocol Select the protocol TCP or UDP or select User defined and enter the protocol service type number 0 means any protocol number TOS Type of TOS defines the DS Differentiated Service field in the IP header Service Enter the new TOS value of the outgoing packet between 0 and 255 0 is the lowest priority TOS Mask The TOS mask is used to compare the specified or entire bits in the TOS IP header with the value specified in this rule Enter the TOS Mask value between 0 lowest priority and 255 Back Click Back to go to the previous screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Table 78 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Table 79 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119
206. e Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix L Legal Information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66499 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel
207. e ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the ZyXEL Device You could simply restore your last configuration 1 4 LEDs The following figure shows the ZyXEL Device s LEDs Figure3 Front Panel ZyXEL P 600 series POWER ERES 4 WAN DSL INTERNET P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device The following table describes the LEDs Table 2 Front Panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and functioning properly Blinking The ZyXEL Device is rebooting or performing diagnostics Red On Power to the ZyXEL Device is too low Blinking The system is not ready or has malfunctioned ETHERNET Green On The ZyXEL Device has a successful Ethernet connection ia Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data Off The LAN is not co
208. e first time you are setting up your router or if you need to make basic configuration changes 2 Click INTERNET WIRELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access P 660HW Dx User s Guide 53 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 16 Wizard Welcome Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup 3 The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard detects your connection type and your ISP uses PPPoE or PPPoA go to Section 3 2 1 on page 55 The screen varies depending on the connection type you use If the wizard does not detect a connection type and the following screen appears see Figure 17 on page 54 check your hardware connections and click Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard to have the ZyXEL Device detect your connection again Figure 17 Auto Detection No DSL Connection ffi Internet Configuration ter has a L light on the ill blink t ying tc f Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard Continue to Wireless Setup wizard Yes If the wizard still cannot detect a connection type and the following screen appears see Figure 18 on page 55 click Next and refer to Section 3 2 2 on page 55 on how to configure the ZyXEL Device for Internet access manually P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 18 Auto Detection Failed f Internet Configuration Connection Type
209. e port such as Web on port 80 other ports are also active If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port Some of the most common IP ports are Table 52 Common IP Ports 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls 9 4 2 Types of DoS Attacks There are four types of DoS attacks 1 Those that exploit bugs in a TCP IP implementation Those that exploit weaknesses in the TCP IP specification Brute force attacks that flood a network with useless data IP Spoofing Ping of Death and Teardrop attacks exploit bugs in the TCP IP implementations of various computer and host systems a Ff WS KN Ping of Death uses a ping utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize packet 1s then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or reboot Teardrop attack exploits weaknesses in the re assembly of IP packet fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original IP packet except that it contains an offset field that says for instance This fragment is carrying bytes 200 through 400 of the original non fragmented IP packet The Teardrop program creates a series of IP fragments with overlapping offset fields
210. eccceiessecces esteso t eontra ice reneis ease ced adve catio de A 41 THEA SeU SEGO MT E 44 Table gt Sats ala ae LT 46 Teades Status WLAN cu emt 47 Table 7 tate Packet Statshis T M TU hai 48 Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters ccecccceeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneaeeaeeeeeeeeeeteneeees 56 Table 8 Internet Connection wilh PPPOE 252 5 5 5 rra I eror I FEE rre HU d be AAAA aAA 57 Table TO Intemet Connection with RFC TABS ass lera tn E eub E ERREUR Eee ERR EER I USE EN rAR CELERE Fes M Ea EEN 57 Table 17 Intemet Connection with ENET ENGAP uiccsederkkexre e eU xptd abdo k Cot AER donean aadu botnin a aiii 58 Table 12 Internet Cotinection with PPPOA 253 corra tr pn Ma rre rra Fi di esce nde vete bb ade Ee ones 59 Table T3 Wireless LAN Settip Wizard T Lee etes ette put aa ee c obe atv etx e tad iato RAM RE ITA RPM RR 61 Tabe 14 Wireless LAN Eis rz p 62 Table 15 Manually assign a WPA KOy disse ie reci tik kabet atu EU hada F9 bea ERE BEL Ko Fa t ARa R RARE tla E bbb 63 Table t5 Manually assign a WEP KOy aiieduieasisu USO ERAI an Ne eae Rae 64 Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services eseeeseese eene 67 Table 18 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information c cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 69 Table 19 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration sssssssseeemnn 70 Tabe 20 iie II e I
211. ecifications and Wall Mounting Wall mounting Instructions Complete the following steps to hang your ZyXEL Device on a wall ex See the Hardware Specifications table for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them 1 Select a high position on a sturdy wall that is free of obstructions 2 Drill two holes for the screws 3 Becareful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 4 Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 5 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the ZyXEL Device with the connection cables 6 Align the holes on the back of the ZyXEL Device with the screws on the wall Hang the ZyXEL Device on the screws Figure 150 Wall mounting Example EX iii HNN Mii The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting 270 Figure 151 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22 0 1 2 01 2 16 30 0 2 0 30 0 2 0 MM c P 660HW Dx User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wirele
212. ect 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device Select Mixed to allow either IEEE802 11b or IEEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced Max Frame Burst Enable Maximum Frame Burst to help eliminate collisions in mixed mode networks networks with both IEEE 802 11g and IEEE 802 11b traffic and enhance the performance of both pure IEEE 802 11g and mixed IEEE 802 11b g networks Maximum Frame Burst sets the maximum time in micro seconds that the ZZyXEL Device transmits IEEE 802 11g wireless traffic only Type the maximum frame burst between 0 and 1800 650 1000 or 1800 recommended Enter 0 to disable this feature Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 37 Wireless LAN Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen In a wireless network the wireless clients must have the same SSID and security settings as the access point AP or wireless router we will refer to both as AP here in order to associate with it Traditionally this meant that you had to configure the settings on the AP and then manually configure the exact same settings on each wireless clien
213. ed Settings Add sssssssesss 220 Figure T29 Syston TES WOW ago tipeetiuttu des ba ten io easel dan beluqdekes tuv ped epu ad conce vag UR 220 Figure 130 Internet Connection Statue 1 esce etpr ttr sotrssaustenmeasniytockausstsooneaenss a 221 Figure 131 Network Connects eoe sabe tct iar EL bamesawecassnneubuts ERR eR CU EE RA FEL E E ER EE SMELL EK RE ee ur KEAN Ead 222 Figure 132 Network Connections My Network Places c c cccsceesssccceeeeesecceceeseteneeeeeesseeeecerentnenees 223 Figure 133 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example sssssss 223 Figure 134 System General Setup i e neu aenrrtndi rhn kl tan rte EE EPA ORA ERR AR ERN RM RA RU Mu 44 228 Figure 135 System lime SONG e 229 2g Eco VON LOT X 234 gi qtd ESEES noc renner tr ter errr tr er ere tree renter rey metre r center nrererer rr rier terre rertrrrr rete 235 xl 3Ecg c ans cine n 237 P s id t pate ede eden pats Vea ew tala A Venteda tied ad bdGeede 251 Figur 140 Firmware Upload uiti c E E D IR 252 Figure 141 Network Temporarily Disconnected iiiusseiceseset etn teer rota t nd t tr i n ES 252 x MUTO dU o T EAN EAAS R EA EAE EAAS KAENA NERAN 253 Figure 143 ConhguratiOri M 253 Figure 144 Configuratio
214. ed and unused bandwidth equally among the other classes 1024 kbps extra goes to each so the other classes each get a total of 3072 kbps P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management 13 6 3 Bandwidth Management Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through an interface Table 73 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Mid Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Low This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users 13 7 Over Allotment of Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth management speed for an interface higher than the interface s actual transmission speed Higher priority traffic gets to use up to its allocated bandwidth even if it takes up all of the interface s available bandwidth This could stop lower priority traffic from being sent The following is an example Table 74 Over Allotment of Bandwidth Example BANDWI
215. ed the established state the TCP three way handshake has not yet been completed see Figure 82 on page 146 For UDP half open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic The ZyXEL Device measures both the total number of existing half open sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts Both TCP and UDP half open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements Measurements are made once a minute When the number of existing half open sessions rises above a threshold max incomplete high the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half open requests as necessary until the number of existing half open sessions drops below another threshold max incomplete low When the rate of new connection attempts rises above a threshold one minute high the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half open sessions as necessary until the rate of new connection attempts drops below another threshold one minute low The rate is the number of new attempts detected in the last one minute sample period 10 10 2 1 TCP Maximum Incomplete and Blocking Time An unusually high number of half open sessions with the same destination host address could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is being launched against the host Whene
216. ed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter error settings readNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter error settings WAN connection is down A WAN connection is down You cannot access the network through this interface Table 96 Access Control Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded lt Packet Direction gt according to the default policy s setting Firewall rule NOT match TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched or did not match a configured firewall rule Packet Direction lt rule d gt denoted by its number and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule 238 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 96 Access Control Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Triangle route packet forwarded The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE _ through OSPF Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked TCP UDP IGMP ESP corresponding NAT table entry GRE OSPF message TCP Router sent blocked web site The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site
217. ed to pass through even though a connection from the Internet would normally be rejected In order to achieve this the ZyXEL Device inspects the application level FTP data Specifically it searches for outgoing PORT commands and when it sees these it adds a cache entry for the anticipated data connection This can be done safely since the PORT command contains address and port information which can be used to uniquely identify the connection Any protocol that operates in this way must be supported on a case by case basis You can use the web configurator s Custom Ports feature to do this P 660HW Dx User s Guide 151 Chapter 9 Firewalls 9 6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall Change the default password via CLI Command Line Interpreter or web configurator Limit who can telnet into your router Don t enable any local service such as SNMP or NTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 9 6 1 Security I
218. eene eee nennen nennen nnn tnnt 225 LOUIE S EOP ene BUTE ou MELDE Ux Unt E ener arr een Tae reMn T EAT 227 LOGS 233 o 251 Ricco e uer 257 Bii nage 259 Appendices and NOK quet 263 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 9 Contents Overview P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Vs rs cnl toe m 3 rere dr pid n E 4 Saroy War aan T PT 6 CONSE COVE POW PR A 9 TERE 1o ptpgl cH 11 stor ROWO qc 21 Hst of Tables MT M M a 27 Part E Modu poo eein E RR ie eee 31 Chapter 1 introducing tho ZyXEL DOVIGO sicccnswissinsenscsnnssnnssneriivacnennsdntinntannannsnsiuensdenniandnnsnniancnnsinanionansnniok 33 UUER co gern eed eee an AE A A A EA EE A T 33 Ja Ways To Manage Me Ly AEL DOVO saisikaan n EN 35 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Devig icccccassiccesssisozeseeersesesaesiannncscacvsassesdeasenseescas 35 a A i SE A ETIA SA AAE ATA ATIS AA TAE IEA E ER IATA TEE caucustin eats 35 1 5 Hardware Connections sisriisivco siinnd tainen nE NE RETEA Oee AANE aL E e 36 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 2 sc
219. either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping see Table 45 on page 132 NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 8 1 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses and por
220. elay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice 5 3 1 2 Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers 5 3 1 3 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for burs
221. eless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate 272 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 154 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet wow ORE Se S E x mE MUS NUN de ae ne ITI SmSm oe Sy B p ER usua B 7 N L E Li A OE 4 EN N S Ed NC e gt Sg BSS 1 lal t 2 ort tee n c ort i RE Ei ee ee m od Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel
222. em Setup System Name Domain Name Password ser Password New Password Retype to confirm Admin Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm A Caution Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Administrator Inactivity Timer 60 minutes 0 means no timeout m m Apply Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART I Wizards Wizard Setup for Internet Access 53 Bandwidth Management Wizard 67 Wizard Setup for Internet Access This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens for Internet access in the web configurator 3 1 Introduction Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information given to you by your ISP LES See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields 3 2 Internet Access Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the admin password to access the web configurator select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply Otherwise click the wizard icon t in the top right corner of the web configurator to display the wizard main screen Figure 15 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is th
223. ends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 40 forgot the password 1 The default password is 1234 2 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 40 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 Ifyou changed the IP address Section 6 3 1 on page 95 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix H on page 333 If you disabled Any IP Section 6 3 4 on page 97 make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device If you know that there are routers between your computer and the ZyXEL Device skip this step Ifthere is a DHCP server on your network make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Section 6 3 1 on page 95 Your ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server by default e fthere is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same
224. entions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer lt __ home Server Firewall NN Ss Gum Gay Gat N SS Gm Loa e ya 253 clu a SS Telephone Switch Router P 660HW Dx User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings D gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e e e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate
225. enu 15 SUA Server Setup continued 150000038 SUA Server 9 Protocol lt 0 All 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000039 SUA Server 9 Port Start 0 150000040 SUA Server 9 Port End 0 150000041 SUA Server 9 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 150000042 SUA Server 10 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt zug 150000043 SUA Server 410 Protocol 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000044 SUA Server 10 Port Start 0 150000045 SUA Server 10 Port End 0 150000046 SUA Server 10 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 150000047 SUA Server 11 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000048 SUA Server 11 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000049 SUA Server 11 Port Start 0 150000050 SUA Server 11 Port End 0 150000051 SUA Server 11 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 150000052 SUA Server 12 Active 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000053 SUA Server 12 Protocol 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 50000054 SUA Server 12 Port Start 0 150000055 SUA Server 12 Port End 0 150000056 SUA Server 12 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 Table 143 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 1 Menu 21 Filter set 1 FI EN PVA INPUT 210100001 Filter Set 1 Name Str Menu 21 1 1 1 set 1 rule 1 FI EN PVA INPUT 210101001 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Ty
226. equest response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration 15 7 1 Supported MIBs The ZyXEL Device supports MIB II that is defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1215 The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance 15 7 2 SNMP Traps The ZyXEL Device will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs Table 85 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION 0 coldStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting power on 1 warmstart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting software reboot 6 whyReboot defined in ZYXEL A trap is sent with the reason of restart before MIB rebooting when the system is going to restart warm start 6a For intentional reboot A tra
227. er Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 1 1 3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digit
228. ers 256 Set 2 30201025 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201026 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 4 Table 140 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 Internet Access Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 40000000 Configured lt O No 1 1 Yes gt P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 140 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continued 40000001 ISP lt O No 1 1 Yes gt 40000002 Active lt 0 No 1 l Yes 40000003 ISP s Name ChangeMe 40000004 Encapsulation lt 2 PPPOE 2 3 RFC 1483 4 PPPOA 5 ENET ENCAP gt 40000005 Multiplexing lt 1 LLC based 1 2 VC based 40000006 VPI 0 40000007 VCI d 35 40000008 Service Nam lt Str gt any 40000009 My Login lt Str gt test pga 40000010 My Password lt Str gt 1234 40000011 Single User Account lt 0 No 1 1 Yes gt 40000012 IP Address Assignment lt 0 Static 1 1 Dynamic gt 40000013 IP Address 0 0 0 0 40000014 Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 40000015 Remote IP subnet mask 0 40000016 ISP incoming protocol filter set 1 6 40000017 ISP incoming protocol filter set 2 256 40000018 ISP incoming protocol filter set 3
229. escriptions This section provides descriptions of example log messages Table 94 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION successful Time calibration is The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server Time calibration failed The router failed to get information from the time server WAN interface gets IP s A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP PPPoE PPTP or dial up server DHCP client IP expired A DHCP client s IP address has expired DHCP server assigns s The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client Successful W EB login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface WEB login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface Successful T ELN ET login Someone has logged on to the router via telnet TELNET login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet Successful F1 P login Someone has logged on to the router via ftp FTP login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp NAT Session Table is Full The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full P 660HW Dx User s Guide 237 Chapter 18 Logs Table 94 System Maintenance Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Star
230. esources on the Internet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration 3 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective 4 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers 5 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules 6 Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of plugging the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens 10 3 3 Key Fields For Configuring Rules 10 3 3 1 Action Should the action be to Drop Reject or Permit ex Drop means the firewall silently discards the packet Reject means the firewall discards packets and sends an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender 10 3 3 2 Service Select the service from the Service scrolling list box If the service is not listed it is necessary to first define it See Section 10 8 on page 169 for more information on predefined services 10 3 3 3 Source Address What is the connection s source address is it on the LAN or WAN Is it a single IP a range of IPs or a subnet 10 3
231. ess and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server received user cert whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th The router received a corrupted CRL Certificate Revocation List from received CRL the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to d received ARL code th The router received a corrupted ARL Authority Revocation List from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd data lt size gt too large Max size allowed lt max size gt The router received directory data that was too large the size is listed from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded Cert trusted lt subject name gt The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name Due to lt reason codes gt cert not trusted lt subject name gt Due to the reasons listed the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate Please see Table 108 on page 247 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 108
232. ess clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to interact with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your ZyXEL Device is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentity Iftwo wireless networks overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 2 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 2 1 SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the infor
233. ess list entries are deleted 9 5 2 Stateful Inspection and the ZyXEL Device Additional rules may be defined to extend or override the default rules For example a rule may be created which will Block all traffic of a certain type such as IRC Internet Relay Chat from the LAN to the Internet Allow certain types of traffic from the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN Allow access to a Web server to everyone but competitors Restrict use of certain protocols such as Telnet to authorized users on the LAN These custom rules work by evaluating the network traffic s Source IP address Destination IP address IP protocol type and comparing these to rules set by the administrator The ability to define firewall rules is a very powerful tool Using custom rules it is possible to disable all firewall protection or block all access to the Internet Use extreme caution when creating or deleting firewall rules Test changes after creating them to make sure they work correctly Below is a brief technical description of how these connections are tracked Connections may either be defined by the upper protocols for instance TCP or by the ZyXEL Device itself as with the virtual connections created for UDP and ICMP 9 5 3 TCP Security The ZyXEL Device uses state information embedded in TCP packets The first packet of any new connection has its SYN flag set and its ACK flag cleared these are initiation packets All
234. et set gt icmp timeout seconds This command sets the time period to allow an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response Config edit firewall set set gt udp idle timeout seconds This command sets how long a UDP connection is allowed to remain inactive before the ZyXEL Device considers the connection closed Config edit firewall set set f connection timeout seconds This command sets how long ZyXEL Device waits for a TCP session to be established before dropping the session Config edit firewall set set gt fin wait timeout seconds This command sets how long the ZyXEL Device leaves a TCP session open after the firewall detects a FIN exchange indicating the end of the TCP session P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix E Firewall Commands Table 136 Firewall Commands continued gt rule lt rule gt permit lt forward block gt FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION Config edit firewall set set This command sets how long ZyXEL Device 4 tcp idle timeout seconds _ lets an inactive TCP connection remain open before considering it closed Config edit firewall set set This command sets whether or not the ZyXEL gt log yes no Device creates logs for packets that match the firewall s default rule set Rules Config edit firewall set set This command sets whether packets that match this rule are dropped or allowed
235. et E FEE er Ep pPIEP er bopEDII SEE REED UESREEPEU IUD A 57 Figure 22 Internet Connection with REC 1483 1c eei ttd ett erdt ee ted rt ttt ebrii 57 Figure 23 Internet Connection with ENET ENGAP eeeceeseeeeces eene thank nent a enun nha th a nua nta a a aua ana 58 Figure 24 Interel Connection with PPPOA uo asse pi ac poEX et b ek eL epo vd ER E FEES eR EH Ev aga br be TEMERE CREE END DUE 59 Figuie 25 Connection TES F Ale T sosirea II RE AR LAR ELA EV EUR A AR ARR REL FRA ER ER 59 Figure 26 Connection Test PONS ao Tr TE 60 Figure 27 Connection Test Successful 1e ici tertie idein dott r LAM runes ter eM debet tu iier R 60 Figure 26 Wireless LAM Setup Wizard T aussehen pen et D UR URGE LR RS 61 Figure 29 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 iussa Eobdia ri kreo ERE SEU ac obo c sane AN 62 Figure 30 Manually assign a WPA cs e 63 Figure 31 Manually assign a WEP KEY eco eem te tih Cre apa eani RB GHR HA Cit du FC IRE RREEARA KR T NE 64 Figure 22 Wireless LAN E OO E 64 Figure 33 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete sess 65 Foure 34 Selecta M50 PM TT ET 68 Figure 35 Wizard ur rr e 69 Figure 36 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information seen 69 Figure 37 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration cccccesssccccceeeeeccceeeeeeeeceeeeeseecceeensneacaes 70 Figure 38 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete
236. even if it is not included in the Filter List To have your ZyXEL Device block Web sites containing keywords in their URLs click Security gt Content Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 98 Content Filter Keyword Keyword IV Active Keyword Blocking Block Websites that contain these keywords in the URL bad Delete Clear All Keyword Add Keyword Apply Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Content Filter Keyword LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Keyword Blocking Select this check box to enable this feature Block Websites that This box contains the list of all the keywords that you have configured the contain these keywords in ZyXEL Device to block the URL Delete Highlight a keyword in the box and click Delete to remove it Clear All Click Clear All to remove all of the keywords from the list Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 127 characters Wildcards are not allowed Add Keyword Click Add Keyword after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cance
237. ey Click OK to go back to the ZyXEL utility main screen Figure 68 No AP with OTIST Found Please make sure you have ZyXEL g APs or wireless routers with OTIST function enabled OK fthere is more than one OTIST enabled AP within range you see a screen asking you to select one AP to get settings from 7 4 3 Notes on OTIST 1 If you enabled OTIST in the wireless client you see this screen each time you start the utility Click Yes for it to search for an OTIST enabled AP Figure 69 Start OTIST Don tshow me this window again If an OTIST enabled wireless client loses its wireless connection for more than ten seconds it will search for an OTIST enabled AP for up to one minute If you manually have the wireless client search for an OTIST enabled AP there is no timeout click Cancel in the OTIST progress screen to stop the search When the wireless client finds an OTIST enabled AP you must still click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen or hold in the RESET button for one to five seconds for the AP to transfer settings If you change the SSID or the keys on the AP after using OTIST you need to run OTIST again or enter them manually in the wireless client s If you configure OTIST to generate a WPA PSK key this key changes each time you run OTIST Therefore if a new wireless client Joins your wireless network you need to run OTIST on the AP and ALL wireless clients again P 660HW Dx User s Guide
238. fic traffic from separate LAN subnets Table 69 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example TRAFFIC TYPE FROM SUBNET A FROM SUBNET B VolP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps FTP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps E mail 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Video 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 13 5 Scheduler The scheduler divides up an interface s bandwidth among the bandwidth classes The ZyXEL Device has two types of scheduler fairness based and priority based 13 5 1 Priority based Scheduler With the priority based scheduler the ZyXEL Device forwards traffic from bandwidth classes according to the priorities that you assign to the bandwidth classes The larger a bandwidth class s priority number is the higher the priority Assign real time applications like those using audio or video a higher priority number to provide smoother operation P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management 13 5 2 Fairness based Scheduler The ZyXEL Device divides bandwidth equally among bandwidth classes when using the fairness based scheduler thus preventing one bandwidth class from using all of the interface s bandwidth 13 6 Maximize Bandwidth Usage The maximize bandwidth usage option see Figure 105 on page 192 allows the ZyXEL Device to divide up any available bandwidth on the interface including unallocated bandwidth and any allocated bandwidth that a class is not using among the bandwidth classes that require more b
239. ficate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Enrollment failed The CMP online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve lt CMP CA server url gt The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s IP address cannot be resolved Revd ca cert lt subject name gt The router received a certification authority certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd user cert lt subject name gt The router received a user certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd CRL lt size gt lt issuer name gt The router received a CRL Certificate Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd ARL lt size gt lt issuer name gt The router received an ARL Authority Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th received ca cert The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose addr
240. formation on the labels P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 88 Firewall Edit Rule Edit Rule 2 M Active Action for Matched Packets Permit Source Address Address Type any Address z Start IP boso Any FETES 0 0 0 0 Add gt gt End IP ooo YET vU Address annu Nurs Bx Subnet Mask Delete Destination Address Address Type any Address z ee 0 0 0 6 Add gt gt Any End IP V CES Address Lese Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Delete Service Source Address List Destination Address List Available Services Selected Services Any All Any ICMP _Add AIMINE ICO TCP 5190 AUTH TCP 113 Eo Edit Customized Services Schedule Day to Apply Iv Everyday IV sun V Mon V Tue IV wed V Thu IV Fri V sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format Iv all day Starf houn minute End o hour minute Log ri Log Packet Detail Information Alert Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Firewall Edit Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this firewall rule Action for Matched Packet Use the drop down list box to select what the firewall is to do with packets that match this rule Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a
241. ful of files e mailed to you from strangers One common way of getting BackOrifice on a system is to include it as a Trojan horse with other files Change your passwords regularly Also use passwords that are not easy to figure out The most difficult passwords to crack are those with upper and lower case letters numbers and a symbol such as 96 or Upgrade your software regularly Many older versions of software especially web browsers have well known security deficiencies When you upgrade to the latest versions you get the latest patches and fixes If you use chat rooms or IRC sessions be careful with any information you reveal to strangers If your system starts exhibiting odd behavior contact your ISP Some hackers will set off hacks that cause your system to slowly become unstable or unusable P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls Always shred confidential information particularly about your computer before throwing it away Some hackers dig through the trash of companies or individuals for information that might help them in an attack 9 7 Packet Filtering Vs Firewall Below are some comparisons between the ZyXEL Device s filtering and firewall functions 9 7 1 Packet Filtering The router filters packets as they pass through the router s interface according to the filter rules you designed Packet filtering is a powerful tool yet can be complex to configure and maintain especially if you
242. g sent as E mail Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None If you select Weekly or Daily specify a time of day when the E mail should be sent If you select Weekly then also specify which day of the week the E mail should be sent If you select When Log is Full an alert is sent when the log fills up If you select None no log messages are sent Day for Sending Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs Log Time for Enter the time of the day in 24 hour format for example 23 00 equals 11 00 pm to Sending Log send the logs Clear log after sending mail Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E mail of the logs Syslog Logging The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server Active Click Active to enable syslog logging Syslog Server IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server Refer to the syslog server manual for more information Active Log and Alert Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record Send Immediate Alert Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E mail alerts immediately Apply Click Apply to save your customi
243. g by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
244. g of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 194 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting amp Active scripting Disan Q Pramp 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable 9 Enable Prompt amp Scripting of Java applets Q Disable OQ Prompt Lienas AukhSenkie Sion E b custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected Click OK to close the window cO 0Nv Figure 195 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable es Font download Q Disable 9 Enable a Prompt 3 Microsoft VM Java permissions Q Custom J Disable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset J P 660HW Dx User s Guide 337 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 196 Java Sun Genera
245. guration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client To change your ZyXEL Device s FTP settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt FTP tab The screen appears as shown Figure 114 Remote Management FTP FTP FTP Port zi Access Status WAN v Secured Client IP all Selected 0 0 0 0 q Note You may also need to create a Firewallrule Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Remote Management FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between net
246. h membership in a multicast group The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR nRT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time or VBR RT Variable Bit Rate Real Time for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 7 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the Internet An example is shown in the figu
247. has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 181 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 mt i at i i i M mmmh i I L L L I L I i I L I L I L 7 n mm m m m m m um m 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresp
248. has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 660HW Dx User s Guide Firewall Commands The following describes the firewall commands Table 136 Firewall Commands FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION Firewall SetUp config edit firewall active lt yes no gt This command turns the firewall on or off config retrieve firewall This command returns the previously saved firewall settings config save firewall This command saves the current firewall settings Display config display firewall This command shows the of all the firewall settings including e mail
249. he Internet it sends packets to its default gateway which is not the ZyXEL Device by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN 3 The ZyXEL Device receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device 5 When the ZyXEL Device receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the ZyXEL Device and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device 6 4 Configuring LAN IP Click LAN to open the IP screen See Section 6 1 on page 93 for background information Figure 50 LAN IP LAN TCP IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Table 26 LAN IP The following table describes the fields in this screen LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP IP IP Address Enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given Apply Click Apply to sa
250. he ZyXEL Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature The ZyXEL Device acts as a DNS proxy when the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields are left blank in the LAN Setup screen Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the LAN Setup screen 6 3 LAN TCP IP The ZyXEL Device has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 3 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Addres
251. he current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logging and Tracing Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the ZyXEL Device to an external syslog server PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The ZyXEL Device supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play UPnP A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network Firewall You can configure firewall on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example Content Filter The ZyXEL Device blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering
252. he lower frequency range 0 4AKHz while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range above 4KHz A microfilter acts as a low pass filter for your telephone to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions The use of a telephone microfilter 1s optional 1 Locate and disconnect each telephone P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix J Splitters and Microfilters 2 Connect a cable from the wall jack to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure 4 After you are done make sure that your telephone works If your telephone does not work disconnect the microfilter and contact either your local telephone company or the provider of the microfilter Figure 198 Connecting a Microfilter Wall Jack Microfilter Wall Side Phone Side You can also use a Y Connector with a microfilter in order to connect both your modem and a telephone to the same wall jack without using a POTS splitter 1 Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y Connector 2 Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the ZyXEL Device 4 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure Figure
253. he oldest half open session when new connection request comes Select this radio button to clear the oldest half open session when a new connection request comes Deny new connection request for Select this radio button and specify for how long the ZyXEL Device should block new connection requests when TCP Maximum Incomplete is reached Enter the length of blocking time in minutes between 1 and 256 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration P 660HW Dx User s Guide Content Filtering This chapter covers how to configure content filtering 11 1 Content Filtering Overview Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs Content filtering gives you the ability to block web sites that contain key words that you specify in the URL You can set a schedule for when the ZyXEL Device performs content filtering You can also specify trusted IP addresses on the LAN for which the ZyXEL Device will not perform content filtering 11 2 Configuring Keyword Blocking Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL For example if you enable the keyword bad the ZyXEL Device blocks all sites containing this keyword including the URL http www website com bad html
254. hen click Add gt gt to add it to the Selected Services box on the right To remove a service highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right then click Remove Edit Customized Service Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services Schedule Day to Apply Select everyday or the day s of the week to apply the rule Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format Select All Day or enter the start and end times in the hour minute format to apply the rule Log Log Packet Detail This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not Go Information to the Log Settings page and select the Access Control logs category to have the ZyXEL Device record these logs Alert Send Alert Select the check box to have the ZyXEL Device generate an alert when the rule Message to is matched Administrator When Matched P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Table 58 Firewall Edit Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 10 6 2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the ZyXEL Device For a comprehensive list of port numbers and ser
255. hich you want to configure firewall rules Create a new rule after rule number Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number For example if you select 6 your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 if there is one becomes rule 8 The following read only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction The firewall rules that you configure summarized below take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen This is your firewall rule number The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn Active This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not Select the check box to enable the rule Clear the check box to disable the rule Source IP This drop down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Destination IP This drop down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Service This drop down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies See Section 10 8 on page 169 for more information Action This field displays whether
256. his screen Table 62 Firewall Anti Probing LABEL DESCRIPTION Respond to PING The ZyXEL Device does not respond to any incoming Ping requests when on Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do Not Respond Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the ZyXEL Device by probing for to Requests for unused ports If you select this option the ZyXEL Device will not respond to port Unauthorized request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the ZyXEL Device Services unseen By default this option is not selected and the ZyXEL Device will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the ZyXEL Device s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the ZyXEL Device reacts based on the corresponding firewall policy to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet or an ICMP port unreachable packet for a blocked UDP packets or just drop the packets without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
257. hrough the ZyXEL Device for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Table 89 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Allow UPnP to pass through Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP enabled applications to Firewall bypass the firewall Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application packets for example MSN packets Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 16 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP 16 3 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 120 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication xj To add or remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Compone
258. i I I mi a Y 1 Internet t JU H Ol I li I li I lil I 0 I li y 192 168 1 0 24 a a LE E Amo m um um m um Um Um Em Em um um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 183 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 1 A LE I B D P E3 mo SN i I LE CS hs 5 pos H P T Internet gt a n B TM P i P i i i 9 192 168 1 0 25 4 W192 168 1 128 ue a mumumumumum um eom um um um um um um In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets
259. ice Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service Apply Click Apply to save your settings to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 3 Telnet You can configure your ZyXEL Device for remote Telnet access as shown next The administrator uses Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the ZyXEL Device Figure 112 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network ms J PA P PA 3 Internet P Incoming Traffic User telnets into the LAN 15 4 Configuring Telnet Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet tab to display the screen as shown P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration Figure 113 Remote Management Telnet Q Note Telnet Port ps Access Status LAN amp WAN Secured Client IP all C Selected 0 0 0 0 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Remote Management Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may
260. ice sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP 1 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 30 LAN IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings on your ZyXEL Device See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks 7 1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 56 Example of a Wireless Network ua P m si The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wirel
261. ices such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access will not be allowed unless you configure remote management or create a firewall rule to allow a remote host to use a specific service P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls 9 3 1 Denial of Service Attacks Figure 81 Firewall Application e E P E F r E imn l H 9 4 Denial of Service Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The ZyXEL Device is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks 9 4 1 Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP IP TCP IP in turn is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions An extension number called the TCP port or UDP port identifies these protocols such as HTTP Web FTP File Transfer Protocol POP3 E mail etc For example Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80 When computers communicate on the Internet they are using the client server model where the server listens on a specific TCP UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network For example a Web server typically listens on port 80 Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a singl
262. idth Management Priorities aiiis eee turbet pru bbb hp bb Hd du but Hd Ve Eb d qi aguda 191 Table 74 Over Allotment of Bandwidth Example 2st po terere Fo PER hod Lr o tore Eod ER aa 191 Table 75 Media Bandwidth Management Summary cccceeseeeeceenseneeceeetseneeceeenseceeeeenteeeeeeetnnecs 192 Table 76 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup cccccccicccccccs eiii ie reete tta nensis arenan r 193 Table 7 Sub C lasses DL AF GENEES Lies es uaaa Rep ERU ERE PA HUE Aot E ERR DN EXER via LA UI CH CEU pha S URNA 194 Table 78 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration eese eene nnne nnn nnns 195 Table 79 Services and Port NImbers 22 oos rentrer P RE HR Ded od e bead dod ra 197 Table 80 Bandwidth Management Monitor nennen nennen nnns 198 toble gi Dyname DNS 200 P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Tables Table 62 Remote Management WWW uiuis essetis essaie hr reed ntn dk pa ES HR AG A S d 205 Table 83 Remote Management Tell E 1e sse set rta edet Ak dean tapa pan E ERA axRE REA SL RR aba A eR E ERE FEa BERE M ruina 206 Table 84 Remote Management FE TE 1er rrr eta curta bue rub nda et bt to robbed pde t dde uta 207 Tale B3 SNMP TES esti ci sd Fei a va ea ebd ec a E pe rdc o e a ase Lo i ca te t ta auta 209 Table 95 Remote Management SNMP 2ocscxksetpr d etn PEE ka Fe bed eter he Pd ce REX FEIY n cubre bu ea exp Up caine 210 Table 57 Remote Management DNG scccccccisieccccctsrnseiscdee
263. ield controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Device sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 6 3 3 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 1s not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All
264. ig ethO EVICE ethO0 BOOT yes OOTPROTO zdhcp SERCTL no ERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet ucGUOog Ifyou have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask 1s 255 255 255 0 Figure 177 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE eth0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet 2 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 178 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 179 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface eth
265. igure 162 Windows XP Control Panel 1r rotrre tte re tret ptor ette po ertt auae E eorr aa tae Zuma coo EPI dp Eii 289 Figure 163 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties usse 290 Figure 164 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties eese enne 290 Figure 165 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties esee 291 Figure 166 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties sssssssee emn 292 Figure 167 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties eese rna 293 P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Figures Figure 169 Macintosh OS 279 Apple Wen isac iier ee ti ase E Se E ERE EHE HH vtt EE Erat EE odd eR adda 294 0 25 R 5 2258 rco MISI EMITE ant niteassamsbaueds berkan Sion AiAi si iA EE smmaduea vince 294 Figure 170 Macintosh OS X Apple Ment cmri t oii d ER Veste b PU an Eee Ex PR II QUE EE Ee PUN Fan cra rk Eee 295 Figure TT Nscies OS A MBIIORE aissscceiexet orbata dd og edd dg added dada gc eaa d c n dg e daa 296 Figure 172 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices ecsccceeeeeesceceeeeeeecaceeeteeecacenneneaes 297 Figure 173 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General secccccccenssececssssssscecsestssececenseseeecceeeenneecsearneeee 297 Figure 174 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS sse 298 Figure 175 RedHat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate ueste a berece had np ete cerbxkea ipaa ibn
266. iment or BIIWIQUE assauntekenaktpASdaukkentdpdnn ERE CHEF RUE CHR Rn vx e rada n bu da 191 155 8 SSOMNGUNNG SUNTAN TE ossasceio vecta stirred were cogar lo pta o uA gv a at oa ad dado tsi d 191 13 9 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup esee eda iiatdad dada ead ak di d d al cda 192 jk qe E 194 13 10 41 DSGP and Pero BOllavim nios ia tod YR ER EE ei o a do vdd e tia 194 1210 2 gern ee 194 13 TI Bandwidth MOWING M 197 Chapter 14 Dynamic DNS Setup 199 14 1 Dynamic DNS CVGFVEGI 22g desde ep cad bc ote van cate des aada a a hc d 199 TET DYNDNS VIVUS Lonsssiesauet ap NU E REIR aaa Rss 199 Tz Soman Dine DI SS iusccssispatctte qup E YOUGGUYRRRO ROGA adt GO Fb e qub eo ttt adit 199 Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration eese eeeeueeeuee eene nn nennen 203 15 1 Remote Management OV nloW aT 203 15 1 1 Remote Management Limitetiong cccccciccieisssseceeccsctsecsssessrtetesssssrsenisessstncmnassavvenmene 204 15 1 2 Remote Management and NAT ws sscccusccsnsiecierssnrereisdsnarnniansinmcieissnpaceessinneceeeasonaes 204 T o coc Nn Wet 204 pav me 204 Roce SIVAN MEER D a 205 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents jit ies D ma TONE cer 205 pp a e er REM 206 15 6 Conigunng FIP 207 Troll EE 207 157 1 Suppuned MIES siete cep tora RO En o ciu io re een bein teo mad eis 209 Ta
267. in this screen Table 38 OTIST LABEL DESCRIPTION Setup Key Type an OTIST Setup Key of exactly eight ASCII characters in length The default OTIST setup key is 01234567 Note If you change the OTIST setup key here you must also make the same change on the wireless client s Yes If you want OTIST to automatically generate a WPA PSK you must Change your security to any security other than WPA PSK in the Wireless LAN gt General screen Select the Yes checkbox in the OTIST screen and click Start The wireless screen displays an auto generated WPA PSK and is now in WPA PSK security mode The WPA PSK security settings are assigned to the wireless client when you start OTIST Note If you already have a WPA PSK configured in the Wireless LAN General screen and you run OTIST with Yes selected OTIST will use the existing WPA PSK Start Click Start to encrypt the wireless security data using the setup key and have the ZyXEL Device set the wireless client s to use the same wireless settings as the ZyXEL Device You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless client s all within three minutes 7 4 1 2 Wireless Client Start the ZyXEL utility and click the Adapter tab Select the OTIST check box enter the same Setup Key as your AP s and click Save P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 64 Example Wireless Client OTIST Screen a Link Info
268. ine reinitialize 258 ADSL standards 34 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 280 alerts 233 ALG 132 alternative subnet mask notation 303 antenna directional 283 gain 283 omni directional 283 antenna gain 116 Any IP 97 267 how it works 97 note 97 Any IP Setup 99 AP 105 AP access point 273 application layer gateway 132 Application Layer Gateway See ALG application level firewalls 144 ARP 97 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 see AAL5 ATM loopback test 258 attack alert 174 attack types 148 attacks 233 auxiliary gateway 267 B backup 253 Index backup gateway 267 backup settings 253 backup type 90 bandwidth 67 budget 193 bandwidth management 67 187 bandwidth manager class configuration 192 monitor 197 summary 191 Basic Service Set See BSS 271 Basic wireless security 63 blocking time 173 brute force attack 147 BSS 271 C CA 278 CBR 83 88 Certificate Authority See CA certifications 347 notices 348 viewing 348 change password at login 39 channel 105 273 interference 273 channel ID 109 Class of Service 194 Class of Service CoS 194 computer name 227 228 configuration 94 251 253 298 backup 253 restore 253 254 upload 254 configuration text file 315 connection failure 267 contact information 351 content filtering 177 categories 177 schedule 178 trusted computers 179 URL keyword blocking 177 Continuous Bit Rate P 660HW Dx User s Guide 357 Index
269. ing from the LAN 15 1 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling 15 2 WWW To change your ZyXEL Device s World Wide Web settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen Figure 111 Remote Management WWW www Port eo Access Status WAN Y Secured Client IP all C selected 0 0 0 0 Note CO UPnPto function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using 2 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Apply Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Remote Management WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this serv
270. ing to take effect in hour minute format End Time Enter the end time when you want the content filtering to stop in hour minute format Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 11 4 Configuring Trusted Computers To exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your ZyXEL Device click Security gt Content Filter gt Trusted The screen appears as shown Figure 100 Content Filter Trusted Trusted User IP Range From IP address To IP address Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Content Filter Trusted LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted User IP Range From Type the IP address of a computer or the beginning IP address of a specific range of computers on the LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering To Type the ending IP address of a specific range of users on your LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering Leave this field blank if you want to exclude an individual computer Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Content Filtering P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART V Advanced Static Route 183 Bandwidth Management 187 Dynamic DNS Setup 199 Remo
271. ion sharing NetMeeting uses H 323 H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service H 323 is transported primarily over TCP using the default port number 1720 VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 VoIP H 323 Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service H 323 is transported primarily over TCP using the default port number 1720 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transm
272. ions File Q Back P d 2 Search lE Folders Ez Address Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help e Metwork Connections 2 m m eT ea ty e m t ty lt Network Tasks s Create a new connection Internet Connection Disable LAN or H Status Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device m Rename this connection View status of this connection Create Shortcut E alli Rename Properties Change settings of this 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 126 Internet Connection Properties E H Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 127 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Mdvancec Settings a Services Selec Ihe ssvicer running on pour melwok that Intemel user can aas Seraces mernege 192 168 1 88 3853 27111 UDP msraso 192 166 1 91 7281 26097 UDP V mesg 192 1681 97
273. ireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the ZyXEL Device Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key 7 2 5 One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST With ZyXEU s OTIST you set up the SSID and WPA PSK on the ZyXEL Device Then the ZyXEL Device transfers them to the devices in the wireless networks As a result you do not have to set up the SSID and encryption on every device in the wireless network The devices in the wireless network have to support OTIST and they have to be in range of the ZyXEL Device when you activate it See Section 7 4 on page 117 for more details T 3 General Wireless LAN Screen BS If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device s new settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 57 Wireless LAN General Wireless Setup IV Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Chan
274. is time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 145 Temporarily Disconnected E Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default ZyXEL Device IP address 192 168 1 1 See the appendix for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 Tools Figure 146 Configuration Restore Error System Restore Restore configuration error The configuration file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file Click Help for more information Return 19 2 3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the RESET button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your ZyXEL Device Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for more information on the RESET button 19 3 Restart System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Res
275. ission Control Protocol 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the admin password to access the web configurator select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply Otherwise click the wizard icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to display the wizard main screen Figure 34 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router or if you need to make basic configuration changes Use Advanced mode if you need access ton more advanced features mot included i in Wizard mode Erga pm m P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard 2 Click BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT SETUP to configure the system for Internet access Figure 35 Wizard Welcome Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup INTERNET WIRELESS SETUP guration 3 Activate bandwidth management and select to allocate bandwidth to packets based on the service requirements Figure 36 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information STEP 1 STER 2 fH General Information Select the check box to apply bandwidth management to traffic going through the device iv Active O Services Setup lt Back Next gt Exit The following fields describe the label in this screen Table 18 B
276. ist of Tables Table 39 MAC Address FINE 1oussxpereiti Ge tm sansa seni sasanssaaytensesaeul ace res Psi En ect dta Coe etes dd 121 Tee d VERTI ONES Frontes doarre eindina EE IA QUEE CEN PAS QU IUE EX UE ERE EPEUUE RE ET Ainii FERRE dE EAE 122 Table41 Commony Used Services iussus cie e veseiv c eiie dr hera OVV Ferd ca dU va E HUN e EP VR IOVI EE REN e aaier 124 Tao AZ Wireless Lan OGS eraa a seta edi Dose td lad Bd E pibe Ri a A e ta 126 Table 43 Applicaton Pront Erg rj m M 127 D TA INED M 129 Tae StS NAT Mapping DUDESE iassedieresecedkE RENte vago Pekin eU EENS EE AEAEE EAA EUER DA NR RAV SR SuSE ERO EXE CERE Rd V KR RE 132 Table 45 NAT SHI aisuausisiivibidnpd ptu En dea E xp EIS IEEE Ur Hide rcm ME 133 Tab 47 Services and Port MImbBel amp caudate cus e o n rr aee PA pco LE t o o dod ada 134 Table 4S NAT Port Forwarding sererai isana eiodad adis pua Vedan vapid 136 Table 49 Port Forwarding Rule Setup scdsccciciscenccvcisgisssceensrsstdcesngaseceensseusrtouieaauey EAER NEEE 137 Table 50 Address Mapping Pulas sisaan aae E e ER E PEE ato Rada ded 138 Table 91 Edit Address Mapping Rule auscieseo atre RIO Ex en RF RE RRE PER FEE FR NA EbRF E ERMER REP ri b HERRERA MM EEUU 140 Table 52 Common IP POMS suada bue VE iaaa naa D Esse qi seunidedivea E ROLE Me pr Son 145 Table 53 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts euenit dnd hd naa eaa aa xta dn ua 148 Table 54 Legal NABIOS Commands soss pL an
277. ity Based to give preference to bandwidth classes with higher priorities Select Fairness Based to treat all bandwidth classes equally Max Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device divide up all of the interface s Bandwidth unallocated and or unused bandwidth among the bandwidth classes that require Usage bandwidth Do not select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a bandwidth class or you want to limit the speed of this interface see the Speed field description Apply Click Apply to save your settings to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 9 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup You must use the Bandwidth Management Summary screen to enable bandwidth management on an interface before you can configure rules for that interface P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup to open the following screen Figure 106 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup Rule Setup Rule Setup Direction LAN Service WWW 7 Priority High Bandwidth fio Add kbps To LAN Interface active Rule Name Destination Port Priority Bandwidth kbps i MW www o High 10 g A 2 Ww Telnet 0 Mid 10 B Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Dire
278. l Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings btain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 168 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser ADSL Control and Status Control Panels Appearance J Favorites Apple Menu Options 2 Key Caps AppleTalk Ne
279. l Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 gH Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections amp Java ee Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr lt appleb eques estan gt Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr lt appleb eques esar requires restart 3 Microso O Java ae enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing xf gt Restore Defaults P 660HW Dx User s Guide NetBIOS Filter Commands The following describes the NetBIOS packet filter commands Introduction NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls You can configure NetBIOS filters to do the following Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets through VPN connections Allow or disallow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Display NetBIOS Filter Settings Syntax sys
280. l Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 8 5 Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world P 660HW Dx User s Guide pas Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 8 5 1 Default Server IP Address BS In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen If you do not as
281. l Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 11 3 Configuring the Schedule To set the days and times for the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering click Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule The screen appears as shown Figure 99 Content Filter Schedule co EA Schedule Active Everyday to Block IV Edit Daily to Block Monday Iv fe hdo min 17 hrf30 min Tuesday iv 0 h0 min o hio min Wednesday Vv 0 bro min 0 ho min Thursday Iv o ho min o ho min Friday 1 o hdo min fo hrf min Saturday E o ndo Imin 0 ndo min Sunday L 0 hdo min 0 hrf min Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Content Filter Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Schedule Select Active Everyday to Block to make the content filtering active everyday Otherwise select Edit Daily to Block and configure which days of the week or everyday and which time of the day you want the content filtering to be active Active Select this option to allow continuous filtering of websites based on the keywords you Everyday to have chosen Block Edit Daily to Select this option to filter websites according to the day s and time s configured Block Active Select the check box to have the content filtering active on the selected day Start Time Enter the start time when you want the content filter
282. lation only Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 23 More Connections Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Multiplexing Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC By prior agreement a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 will carry IP If you select VC specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol For LLC based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header In this case only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Obtain an IP Select this if you get a dynamic IP address from your Internet Service Provider Address ISP A dynamic IP ad
283. ld virtual connections in the cache For instance any UDP packet that originates on the LAN will create a cache entry Its IP address and port pairs will be stored For a short period of time UDP packets from the WAN that have matching IP and UDP information will be allowed back in through the firewall A similar situation exists for ICMP except that the ZyXEL Device is even more restrictive Specifically only outgoing echoes will allow incoming echo replies outgoing address mask requests will allow incoming address mask replies and outgoing timestamp requests will allow incoming timestamp replies No other ICMP packets are allowed in through the firewall simply because they are too dangerous and contain too little tracking information For instance ICMP redirect packets are never allowed in since they could be used to reroute traffic through attacking machines 9 5 5 Upper Layer Protocols Some higher layer protocols such as FTP and RealAudio utilize multiple network connections simultaneously In general terms they usually have a control connection which is used for sending commands between endpoints and then data connections which are used for transmitting bulk information Consider the FTP protocol A user on the LAN opens a control connection to a server on the Internet and requests a file At this point the remote server will open a data connection from the Internet For FTP to work properly this connection must be allow
284. llow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 7 7 QoS Screen The QoS screen by default allows you to automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of the packets it sends 7 7 1 ToS Type of Service and WMM QoS ToS defines the DS Differentiated Service field in the IP packet header The ToS value of outgoing packets is between 0 and 255 0 is the lowest priority WMM QoS checks the ToS in the header of transmitted data packets It gives the application a priority according to this number If the ToS is not specified then transmitted data is treated as normal or best effort traffic P 660HW Dx User s Guide E Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen displays Figure 71 Wireless LAN QoS Qos Qos WMM QoS Policy oon OO 0 amp UNE e v Enable WMM QoS Ss S l Application Priority o oouoooo ooco o UU UU Ui UR UR UU Eb E E B E B E B B iB Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 42 Wireless Lan QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION QoS Enable WMM QoS Select
285. lock sites containing certain keywords in the URL Schedule Use this screen to set the days and times for the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering Trusted Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your ZyXEL Device Advanced Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes Bandwidth Summary Use this screen to enable bandwidth management on an MGMT interface Rule Setup Use this screen to define a bandwidth rule Monitor Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device s bandwidth usage and allotments Dynamic DNS Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION Remote MGMT WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use HTTPS or HTTP to manage the ZyXEL Device Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the ZyXEL Device FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the ZyXEL Device SNMP Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from whi
286. look at the DNS service UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 123 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 41 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 24032 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IPSEC_TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this
287. lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30201005 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30201006 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 1 30201007 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 2 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 139 Menu 3 30201008 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201009 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201010 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 30201011 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 2 30201012 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201013 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201014 IP Alias 2 lt O No 1 Yes gt 0 30201015 IP Address 0 0 0 0 30201016 IP Subnet Mask 0 30201017 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30201018 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30201019 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 30201020 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 2 30201021 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201022 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201023 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 30201024 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filt
288. mation that is sent in the wireless network 7 2 2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 2 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each
289. me extension 251 finger 134 firewall access methods 155 address type 163 alerts 158 anti probing 171 commands 309 creating editing rules 161 custom ports 164 enabling 158 firewall vs filters 153 guidelines for enhancing security 152 introduction 144 LAN to WAN rules 158 policies 155 rule checklist 156 rule configuration key fields 157 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index rule logic 156 rule security ramifications 156 services 169 types 143 when to use 153 firmware 33 251 upgrade 251 upload 251 upload error 252 fragmentation threshold 274 FTP 67 134 204 207 restrictions 204 full rate 341 H half open sessions 173 help 41 hidden node 273 hide SSID 106 host 228 229 host name 227 HTTP 134 144 145 251 hub 33 humidity 265 Hypertext Transfer Protocol see HTTP IANA 95 164 308 IBSS 271 ICMP 147 171 ICMP echo 147 IEEE 802 119 275 IGMP 96 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 271 initialization vector IV 280 Integrated Services Digital Network see ISDN internal SPTGEN 315 FTP upload example 317 points to remember 316 text file 315 Internet access 34 53 wizard setup 53 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 308 see IANA 95 Internet Control Message Protocol see ICMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol see IGMP IP address 95 134 135 136 265 IP address assignment 77 ENET ENCAP 77 PPPoA or PPPoE 77 RFC 1483 77 IP policy routing IPPR 267
290. mmended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Password User Password If you log in with the user password you can only view the ZyXEL Device status The default user password is user New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the ZyXEL Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Admin If you log in with the admin password you can configure the advanced features as Password well as the wizard setup on the ZyXEL Device P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 1
291. n Table 75 Media Bandwidth Management Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface These read only labels represent the physical interfaces Select an interface s check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the ZyXEL Device and be managed by bandwidth management Active Select an interface s check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface Speed kbps Enter the amount of bandwidth for this interface that you want to allocate using bandwidth management The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 1000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 1 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed This may stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth You can also set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed If you do not enable Max Bandwidth Usage this will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interface s available bandwidth Scheduler Select either Priority Based or Fairness Based from the drop down menu to control the traffic flow Select Prior
292. n General You can never be too careful Factors outside your firewall filtering or NAT can cause security breaches Below are some generalizations about what you can do to minimize them Encourage your company or organization to develop a comprehensive security plan Good network administration takes into account what hackers can do and prepares against attacks The best defense against hackers and crackers is information Educate all employees about the importance of security and how to minimize risk Produce lists like this one DSL or cable modem connections are always on connections and are particularly vulnerable because they provide more opportunities for hackers to crack your system Turn your computer off when not in use Never give out a password or any sensitive information to an unsolicited telephone call or e mail Never e mail sensitive information such as passwords credit card information etc without encrypting the information first Never submit sensitive information via a web page unless the web site uses secure connections You can identify a secure connection by looking for a small key icon on the bottom of your browser Internet Explorer 3 02 or better or Netscape 3 0 or better If a web site uses a secure connection it is safe to submit information Secure web transactions are quite difficult to crack Never reveal your IP address or other system networking information to people outside your company Be care
293. n ONMP C T HH 209 yp S Comigurmg SNMP NEM THE 209 jo COMA DIN oe TS 210 Ree Realise ict i ep S 211 Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPMP J ren 3a pbx aV KE ERMRR GU eenei neinei 213 15 7 Introducing Universal Plug and Play 2 tierra irren erben Feb ERE Idee sadideseysonemeasannescaciniens 213 16 1 1 How do know if lm USING UPAR 1 c rrite ettet beet ad uuta sions epus ea tb ide p babe 213 USE EINE cT 213 jme CUO Nis Se UPF seana 219 Wea DPRP and ZIEL ciodidescemeemii etate aped e Ht ie tee ctos adi Pep iod 214 ju Eris rui quer D 214 16 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example 12 cisci etui ioco prre t t rore sikaria 215 16 3 1 Installing UPNF in Windows Me uidere dte ros c od di rd a c t t 215 16 3 2 installing Ulnie in WIndows AP 2uiccstod e e Rue REPE RE RFT EE ERES du E CHE dna erp Pena RnEER 216 16 4 Using UPHP in Windows XP Example iere tioto ratus i otto tmat aao tn muet re tuat eoi tn I Rina 217 16 4 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device sseee 218 16 4 2 Web Configurator Easy ACCESS T 221 Part VI Maintenance and Troubleshooting 225 Chapter 17 cll p omaaaured aie aa 227 UAEcC ILETCOUONM 227 17 1 1 General Setup and System Name Luise ka mh nt ames E ih atat sane 227 ARCU oe BST Sj Aer 227 pr uoces EU 229 Chapter 18 B nr emm Mr T UAR 233 Tor Sus cl c 233 VST A IGS and LOGS MEER 233
294. n Restore Successful usse dise addendo isidin srr nn 254 Figure 145 Temporarily DISCODBNEDUSEL seisis N 254 Figure 146 Configuration Restore EOF aiiscsissesecisesescustesseretceeostcutuceuu bd dinier insink ian Ee pU in rsata 255 Rd AMPIA kosin oero MM T 255 Figure 1G Diagnosi Gemer usb qur Rep ri PNE MEE MMNU MEME MINE IM 257 Figure 143 Diagnostic DOL Line aiisxazenugsddexadiiei cin d dax cenad god Leve bnt ax Fa Ls npe DA du dad 258 Figure 19580 Walkmounting Example iunio etr oda int nk 3a dod ea dti enc E c a Kd 269 Figure 151 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap SOFGW 22 orte rrrtuti tier rtu t treat nite rtu ne tee p tne Ea EN arnari 270 Figure 152 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network ssse 271 gio Ecierc HE pe f He rd 272 Figure 194 nirastucture WLAN em 273 Foure ese CUR eap aiana aa a a NA 274 Figure 156 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example csccscisessscccsasonesdanesaeeivenchapnaueccebwensdenrsnpes voxeinnnes 281 Figure Tar RAZ EPS PULIBR CSEGEI snieni A RECO Ea ad esl th ei 282 Figure 158 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration eeeaeeeeese esee enean nn tn anna nn 286 Figure 159 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address eese 287 Figure 160 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration sseeeeeeees 288 Figure TOT VRS AF DT MOM oeenn bred van ni sente va dor bul Dvga kt d etant Erba iup se eUs Pas ote ves tap Id M uiu 289 F
295. n the E mail Log Settings fields in Log Settings Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs 18 3 Configuring Log Settings Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device is to record See Section 18 1 on page 233 for more information To change your ZyXEL Device s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings The screen appears as shown Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as soon as the log is full Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access Control may result in many e mails being sent P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Figure 137 Log Settings Log Settings E mail Log Settings Mail Server Mail Subject Send Log to Send Alerts to I Enable SMTP Authentication CS C N Quutgisiings SMTP Server Name or IP Address E Mail Address l E Mail Address IV attacks M any IP Iv 802 1x User Name E Password l Log Schedule When Log is Ful v Day for Sending Log Sunday z Time for Sending Log 0 hour o minute Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging Active Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Server Name or IP Address Log Facility local 1 x Active Log and Alert Log
296. n the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A as the DHCP server assigns them to the ZyXEL Device 5 1 6 Nailed Up Connection PPP A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The ZyXEL Device does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection 1s down A nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Do not specify a nailed up connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 5 1 7 NAT NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 5 2 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost
297. n the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser e cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser 21 3 Internet Access e cannot access the Internet P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 4 on page 35 2 Ifyour ISP gave you Internet connection information make sure you entered it correctly in the Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection screen These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 5 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the ZyXEL Device but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 4 on page 35 2 Rebootthe ZyXEL Device 3 Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on
298. namic DNS Type Dynamic DNS x Host Name User Name Password Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C Use specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 81 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic Select this check box to use dynamic DNS DNS Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS Type service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Option Enable off line This option is available when Custom DNS is selected in the DDNS Type field option Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL that you can specify while you are off line IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP Address address P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chap
299. nction is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 10 9 Anti Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists The ZyXEL Device supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information Click Security gt Firewall gt Anti Probing to display the screen as shown Figure 96 Firewall Anti Probing Anti Probing Anti Probing Respond to PING on LaN amp WAN Do Not Respond to Requests for Unauthorized Services Apply Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in t
300. nd subnet mask of the computer even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet When you disable the Any IP feature only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device s LAN IP address can connect to the ZyXEL Device or access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device Windows NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that Networking enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up NetBIOS over services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls TCP IP However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN Allow between LAN and WAN Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 5 DHCP Setup Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Table 27 Advanced LAN Se
301. nds The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless client from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless client needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 36 Wireless WPA WPA2 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key Update Timer In Seconds The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA 2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA 2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL Device The key must
302. nection Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout o sec Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider e g MyISP This information is for identification purposes only Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE User Name PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here Multiplexing Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Refer to
303. nection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting Starting ppp IPCP Opening The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening Ppp LCP Closing The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is closing ppp IPCP Closing The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing 240 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Table 102 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall Table 103 Content Filtering Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s Keyword blocking The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword s Not in trusted web The web site is not in a trusted domain and the router blocks all traffic list except trusted domain sites s Forbidden Web site The web site is in the forbidden web site list s Contains ActiveX The web site contains Activex s Contains Java The web site contains a Java applet applet s Contains cookie The web site contains a cookie 3 Proxy mode The router detected proxy mode in the packet detected SS The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list but it did not return the category type s s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list and returned the category type s
304. nel 06 2437MHz Security Security Mode No Security Apply Cancel Advanced Setup P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 32 Wireless LAN General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Setup Active Wireless Click the check box to activate wireless LAN LAN Network Name Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless client SSID is associated Wireless clients associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device s new settings Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Adv
305. net Mask RIP Direction RIP Version IP Alias 2 I IP Alias 2 IP Address IP Subnet Mask RIP Direction RIP Version Noe x zizloero S olo ajoj o ofj o 4 4 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 LAN IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1 2 Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the ZyXEL Device IP Address Enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation Alternatively click the right mouse button to copy and or paste the IP address IP Subnet Mask Your ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device RIP Direction RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only Out Only When set to Both or Out Only the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received RIP Version The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Dev
306. ng the Web Configurator BS Even though you can connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly it is recommended that you connect your computer to a LAN port for initial configuration 1 Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Prepare your computer computer network to connect to the ZyXEL Device refer to the Quick Start Guide 3 Launch your web browser 4 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 5 A window displays as shown Figure 4 Password Screen P 660HW D1 Welcome to your router Configuration Interface Enter your password and press enter or click Login 2 2 1 User Access 1 For user access enter the default user password user to view the status only The following window will appear Figure 5 User status screen Refresh Interval None Apply Device Information System Status Host Name System Uptime 43 10 21 Model Number P 660HW D1 Current Date Time 01 02 2000 22 24 54 MAC Address 00 13 49 09 12 14 System Mode Routing Bridging V3 40 AGL 4 b3 CPU Usage 3 22 ZyNOS Firmware Version AIL 2008 i EE DSL Firmware Version TI AR7 07 00 04 00 pomor osans Thin WAN Information DSL Mode NORMAL IP Address IP Subnet Mask VPI VCI LAN Information Down 0 kbps 0 kbps IP Address 192 168 1 1 LAN 1 Do
307. nnected WLAN Green On The wireless LAN is ready Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed DSL Green On The DSL line is up Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the DSL line Off The DSL line is down INTERNET Green On The Internet connection is up Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending receiving data Red On The ZyXEL Device failed to get an IP address Off The Internet connection is down 1 5 Hardware Connections Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections P 660HW Dx User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy ZyXEL Device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default See the chapter on troubleshooting if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 2 Accessi
308. nts M G Address Book Communications 5 5 MB C RF Desktop Themes 0 0 MB M ii Games 10 1 MB L1 E Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB x Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box P 660HW Dx User s Guide EL Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 121 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components ai NetMeeting 3 Phone Dialer 0 2 MB CJ Universal Plug and Play 0 4 MB 9 Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB r Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details Cancel 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Program
309. o pass ICMP through Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked ICMP corresponding NAT table entry Unsupported out of order ICMP The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets ICMP or the ICMP packets are out of order Router reply ICMP packet ICMP The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender Table 100 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION board d line d channel d The router received the setup requirements for a call call is call d s C01 Outgoing Call the reference count number of the call dev is the device type 3 is for dial up 6 is for PPPoE 10 is for PPTP channel or ch is the call channel ID For example board 0 line O channel 0 call 3 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times dev x ch Sx s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call is connected call d s C02 OutCall Connected d s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call was disconnected call d s CO2 Call Terminated Table 101 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION ppp LCP Starting The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage has started ppp LCP Opening The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is opening ppp CHAP Opening The PPP connection s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening ppp IPCP The PPP con
310. ocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 165 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add
311. odel Number MAC Address This is your ZyXEL Device s model name This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your ZyXEL Device ZyNOS Firmware This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date created ZyNOS is ZyXEL s Version proprietary Network Operating System design DSL Firmware This is the DSL firmware version associated with your ZyXEL Device This is Version sometimes needed by technicians to help troubleshoot problems WAN Information DSL Mode This is the standard that your ZyXEL Device is using IP Address This is the WAN port IP address IP Subnet Mask This is the WAN port IP subnet mask Default Gateway This is the IP address of the default gateway if applicable VPI AVCI This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen LAN Information IP Address This is the LAN port IP address P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask This is the LAN port IP subnet mask DHCP This is the WAN port DHCP role Server Relay or None WLAN Information Wireless devices only SSID AN is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless Channel This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now Security This displays the level of wireless
312. og is sent via e mail config edit firewall e mail day lt sunday monday tuesday wednesday thursday friday saturday gt This command sets the day on which the current firewall log is sent through e mail if the ZyXEL Device is set to send it on a weekly basis config edit firewall e mail hour lt 0 23 gt This command sets the hour when the firewall log is sent through e mail if the ZyXEL Device is set to send it on an hourly daily or weekly basis config edit firewall e mail minute lt 0 59 gt This command sets the minute of the hour for the firewall log to be sent via e mail if the ZyXEL Device is set to send it on a hourly daily or weekly basis Attack config edit firewall attack send alert lt yes no gt This command enables or disables the immediate sending of DOS attack notification e mail messages config edit firewall attack block lt yes no gt Set this command to yes to block new traffic after the tcp max incomplete threshold is exceeded Set it to no to delete the oldest half open session when traffic exceeds the tcp max incomplete threshold config edit firewall attack block minute 0 255 This command sets the number of minutes for new sessions to be blocked when the tcp max incomplete threshold is reached This command is only valid when block is set to yes P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix E Firewall Commands
313. on Memet ACCESS ord tbnrcib toi Mme as Er d Eb t d 80 uE dn rni ENiiug enepaM P eem 80 5 5 1 Configuring Advanced Internet Connection Setup esses 82 5 6 Configuring More NID uiis cerca ta edi t oA eia bean arian Miandad Ia PRIM GU EE E PAM DU FEREKA RUDI EE ARA Dd 84 BO T More Eonpeecliang Edit icio reis EFE Ep IPM I pe NEN NA FED dE URP NU QI RM 85 12 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 5 6 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup ou ccccceecceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeteeaeees 88 Bu MEAN FREON Lossssxltstixidiciutesusdusix b AN LENDER MI LICHE ea IERTA SGS EEEE GbR bo E SRM ER Tut FER En S 89 5 0 Coniguring WAN Backup t n a a ioiai aina EA a 89 Chapter 6 LAN EI I 93 cd LAINE MUN pee nme IO UP INPPS 93 671 1 LANS WANS and the ZyXEL Device ocni es Ebo ae d uu TERRAE 93 BLZ DACP Seu asini p ERO D ein DOR d ato rn ox Badii aie A AUR 94 6 2 DNS Server Addresses aariin dieu e Prin a a a aaia etas ili ed a aa term ERR dddd 94 oe EPA PAP TT 94 ex T IP Address and Subnet MASK Lions tr reppt LIS rH REPE REIP ELLE Sen tesa Lbs rt EE eo 95 6 3 2 RIP BUD aieccc E FEE HABI EFEEIB SPAN FRE RRRU HA ERRRVERIEPERARELAERER lane ERR EAPEP RRR ESCENA BUDE 96 so MNCS E TETTE 96 CEDE A ra ec TT nt Ur CU ORE ERSTER 97 sz ga eA LAN eee 98 6 4 1 Configuring Advanced LAN Setup i45 bert serre Maori a rr LK PR PE iinn 99 Oo DAOP OOTI a NI m T 100
314. on computer network address of a packet and the type of application P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls 9 2 2 Application level Firewalls Application level firewalls restrict access by serving as proxies for external servers Since they use programs written for specific Internet services such as HTTP FTP and telnet they can evaluate network packets for valid application specific data Application level gateways have a number of general advantages over the default mode of permitting application traffic directly to internal hosts Information hiding prevents the names of internal systems from being made known via DNS to outside systems since the application gateway is the only host whose name must be made known to outside systems Robust authentication and logging pre authenticates application traffic before it reaches internal hosts and causes it to be logged more effectively than if it were logged with standard host logging Filtering rules at the packet filtering router can be less complex than they would be if the router needed to filter application traffic and direct it to a number of specific systems The router need only allow application traffic destined for the application gateway and reject the rest 9 2 3 Stateful Inspection Firewalls Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol They also
315. onding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 125 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET OCTET OCTET Se TOE 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 126 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0
316. onfiguration IP address M The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Table 10 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes Figure 23 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP ffi Internet Configuration Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask First DNS Server Second DNS Server Gateway IP address paiex 168 9511 0 0 0 0 ou a dynamic IP add ation your ISP gay 1472 2123 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 11 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP Automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not Address fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address Static IP Select Static IP Address if your ISP gives you a
317. onfigure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 6 1 2 1 IP Pool Setup The ZyXEL Device is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 6 2 DNS Server Addresses DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation T
318. onization from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN Allow everyone except your competitors to access a Web server Restrict use of certain protocols such as Telnet to authorized users on the LAN These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Device s default rules 10 3 Rule Logic Overview Study these points carefully before configuring rules 10 3 1 Rule Checklist State the intent of the rule For example This restricts all IRC access from the LAN to the Internet Or This allows a remote Lotus Notes server to synchronize over the Internet to an inside Notes server 1 2 3 4 5 Is the intent of the rule to forward or block traffic What direction of traffic does the rule apply to What IP services will be affected What computers on the LAN are to be affected if any What computers on the Internet will be affected The more specific the better For example if traffic is being allowed from the Internet to the LAN it is better to allow only certain machines on the Internet to access the LAN 10 3 2 Security Ramifications 1 2 Once the logic of the rule has been defined it is critical to consider the security ramifications created by the rule Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical r
319. ons Set up a home or small office network gif View workgroup computers Other Places Local Network ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gate Invoke Create Shortcut Rename Properties 6 Right click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device Figure 133 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway General m Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number 660 Desctiption Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP P 660HW Dx User s Guide PART VI Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device s time and date settings 17 1 General Setup 17 1 1 General Setup and System Name General Setup contains administrative and system related information System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name In Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name n Windows 2000 click Start Settings Control Panel and then double click Sy
320. op down list box WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device even when the ZyXEL Device is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols ReAuthentication Timer In Seconds Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 35 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Idle Timeout In Seconds The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wireless network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to send the username and password again before it can use the wireless network again Some wireless clients may prompt users for a username and pa
321. op up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ Close P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 193 Internet Options Security General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings e Z o e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet A This zone contains all Web sites you Gites haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional a Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting oar WO ND Click OK to close the window Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scriptin
322. ort eo End Port eo Server IP Address 031012 Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 49 Port Forwarding Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this check box to enable the rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this port forwarding rule Start Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field End Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the server here Address Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 7 Address Mapping LS The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in the NAT gt General screen Ordering your rules is important because the ZyXEL Device applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the ZyXEL Device takes the corresponding a
323. orts are probed P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration Figure 118 Remote Management ICMP ICMP ICMP Respond to Ping on LAN amp WAN 7 Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Remote Management ICMP LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping on The ZyXEL Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the ZyXEL Device by probing for unused ports If you select this option the ZyXEL Device will not respond to port request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the ZyXEL Device unseen By default this option is not selected and the ZyXEL Device will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports
324. ote Management DNS q Note DNS DNS Port 53 Access Status LAN Secured Client IP all Selected 0 0 0 0 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Remote Management DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The DNS service port number is 53 Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 9 Configuring ICMP To change your ZyXEL Device s security settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt ICMP The screen appears as shown If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists Your ZyXEL Device supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported p
325. ou Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes Ifthe user name and or password you entered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct the screen displays as shown next Click Back to Username and Password setup to go back to the screen where you can modify them Figure 25 Connection Test Failed 1 STEP T 9 SgTEp 2 ffi Internet Configuration Your lo gin username an d passwo rd are wron g Back to Username and Password setup per Jon es Ifthe following screen displays check if your account is activated or click Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings P 660HW Dx User s Guide 59 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 26 Connection Test Failed 2 STEP1 STEPS Internet Configuration the Inter che your tis t ings you zard a f you st s onta upport Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard 3 3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup After you configure the Internet access information use the following screens to set up your wireless LAN 1 Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings Otherwise select No and skip to Step 6 Figure 27 Connection Test Successful STEP TE a uam ffi
326. our product may differ Internal SPTGEN File Modification Important Points to Remember Each parameter you enter must be preceded by one sign and one space Some parameters are dependent on others For example if you disable the Configured field in menu 1 see Figure 184 on page 315 then you disable every field in this menu If you enter a parameter that 1s invalid in the Input column the ZyXEL Device will not save the configuration and the command line will display the Field Identification Number Figure 185 on page 316 shown next is an example of what the ZyXEL Device displays if you enter a value other than 0 or 1 in the Input column of Field Identification Number 1000000 refer to Figure 184 on page 315 Figure 185 Invalid Parameter Entered Command Line Example field value is not legal error 1 ROM t is not saved error Line ID 10000000 reboot to get the original configuration Bootbase Version V2 02 2 22 2001 13 33 11 RAM Size 8192 Kbytes FLASH Intel 8M 2 The ZyXEL Device will display the following if you enter parameter s that are valid Figure 186 Valid Parameter Entered Command Line Example Please wait for the system to write SPT text file ROM t Bootbase Version V2 02 2 22 2001 13 33 11 RAM Size 8192 Kbytes FLASH Intel 8M 2 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example 1 Launch your FTP application 2 Enter bin The command bin sets the transfe
327. owed 2 No Authentication Required P 660HW Dx User s Guide 327 Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 145 Menu 23 System Menus continued 230400002 ReAuthentication Timer in second 555 230400003 Idle Timeout in second 999 230400004 Authentication Databases lt 0 Local User 1 Database Only 1 RADIUS Only 2 Local RADIUS 3 RADIUS Local gt 230400005 Key Management Protocol 0 8021x 1 WPA 0 2 WPAPSK gt 230400006 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange lt 0 Disable 1 64 0 bit WEP 2 128 bit WEP gt 230400007 PSK 230400008 WPA Mixed Mode lt 0 Disable 0 1 Enable gt 230400009 Data Privacy for Broadcast lt 0 TKIP 1 WEP gt 0 Multicast packets 230400010 WPA Broadcast Multicast Key Update 0 Timer Table 146 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Menu 24 11 Remot anagement Control FIN E PVA INPUT 241100001 TELNET Server Port 23 241100002 TELNET Server Access 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100003 TELNET Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 241100004 FTP Server Port 21 241100005 FTP Server Access lt 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100006 FTP Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 241100007 WEB Server Port 80 241100008 WEB
328. p is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files Cl command sys reboot etc 6b For fatal error A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors 15 7 3 Configuring SNMP To change your ZyXEL Device s SNMP settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP The screen appears as shown Figure 116 Remote Management SNMP SNMP SNMP Port 161 Access Status Disable Secured Client IP all Selected 0 0 0 0 SNMP Configuration Get Community public Set Community public TrapCommunity public TrapDestination 0 0 0 0 q Note You may also need to create a Firewallrule Cancel P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Remote Management SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the ZyXEL Device using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this servic
329. packets that do not have this flag structure are called subsequent packets since they represent data that occurs later in the TCP stream If an initiation packet originates on the WAN this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the Internet into the LAN Except in a few special cases see Upper Layer Protocols shown next these packets are dropped and logged P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Firewalls If an initiation packet originates on the LAN this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the LAN to the Internet Assuming that this is an acceptable part of the security policy as is the case with the default policy the connection will be allowed A cache entry is added which includes connection information such as IP addresses TCP ports sequence numbers etc When the ZyXEL Device receives any subsequent packet from the Internet or from the LAN its connection information is extracted and checked against the cache A packet is only allowed to pass through if it corresponds to a valid connection that is if it is a response to a connection which originated on the LAN 9 5 4 UDP ICMP Security UDP and ICMP do not themselves contain any connection information such as sequence numbers However at the very minimum they contain an IP address pair source and destination UDP also contains port pairs and ICMP has type and code information All of this data can be analyzed in order to bui
330. pe 2 TCP IP MS 210101002 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt ed 210101003 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Protocol 6 210101004 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest IP address 0 0 0 0 210101005 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Subnet 0 Mask 210101006 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Port 137 210101007 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 1 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210101008 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src IP address 0 0 0 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 143 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 1 continued 210101009 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Subnet Mask 0 210101010 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Port 0 210101011 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 0 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210101013 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210101014 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Act Not Match lt 1 check 1 next 2 forward 3 drop gt Menu 21 1 1 2 set 1 rule 2 FI F PVA INPUT 210102001 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Type lt 2 TCP IP gt ec 210102002 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt es 210102003 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Protocol 6 210102004 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest IP address 0 0 0 0 2
331. pen requests as necessary until the number of existing half open sessions drops below this number P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Table 63 Firewall Threshold continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DEFAULT VALUES Maximum Incomplete High This is the number of existing half open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half open sessions When the number of existing half open sessions rises above this number the ZyXEL Device deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests Do not set Maximum Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete Low number 100 existing half open sessions The above values causes the ZyXEL Device to start deleting half open sessions when the number of existing half open sessions rises above 100 and to stop deleting half open sessions with the number of existing half open sessions drops below 80 TCP Maximum Incomplete This is the number of existing half open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half open sessions to that same destination host IP address Enter a number between 1 and 256 As a general rule you should choose a smaller number for a smaller network a slower system or limited bandwidth 10 existing half open TCP sessions Action taken when the TCP Maximum Incomplete threshold is reached Delete t
332. pends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide 231 Chapter 17 System 232 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Logs This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the ZyXEL Device s logs Refer to the appendix for example log message explanations 18 1 Logs Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL Device send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 18 1 1 Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black 18 2 Viewing the Logs Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 18 3 on page 234 Log entries in red indicate alerts The log wraps around and deletes
333. point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area P 660HW Dx User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the
334. power adaptor or cord for your device e Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord e Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Please use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly 6 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Safety Warnings P 660HW Dx User s Guide Safety Warnings P 660HW Dx User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview iiisseir eee cence catny aa tawsargetmennedaadiaai
335. r IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 159 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties E Bindings Advanced NeBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration 1P Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address v Detect connection to network media TN 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in P 660HW Dx User s Guide 287 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 160 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties x Bindings Advanced NeBlos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Domain Suffix Search Order lr Add Remove Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways If you have a gateway IP address type it in the
336. r LAN amp WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access See Appendix E on page 309 for details on configuring firewall rules To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Access Status field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration 15 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the ZyXEL Device will disconnect the session immediately There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time There is a firewall rule that blocks it A filter is applied through the commands to block a Telnet FTP or Web service 15 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Usethe ZyXEL Device s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Usethe ZyXEL Device s LAN IP address when configur
337. r Opens PERO acisre vetito ARRA KK ta aAA eden dan cute asa Ki 334 Figure 191 Inteiper OBI oe PIIVSICU maian a A 335 Figure 192 Popup EN ey SEPIUS fea disses dt ss p Fond ad aap roS a t es wei ete Pod ei oa nal ae edi rao n 335 Figure Ta Miemet BIDS SEGUN uobis place eol bal ada ta dha tat lieti t Du 336 Figure 194 Security Settings Java SCHPUNG 12er er tn iier tnnu ete t prenait ea po duni tiere aa puo pco n E ape Ida ance 337 iQue 195 Security SOLOS Java m 337 EJgure TOR Jas COMITE quscuasebentddtbels eu ad imu rc cer Cnet er ere mrt E RUNI E Mau D er merece Mn err errr UNE 338 Figure 197 Connecting a POTS Sper i uiccses iiid kot rc etu inia bana duas canes denied etta aua ied pido bwe iia 341 Figure 198 Connecting a MIGKOTIIEGE ieiunii e tox dicar E pna al pci d A KR bd di 342 Figure 199 Connecting a Microfilter and Y GCOonlgetor 2ccuccere teet petri teoerap rrr o Erba dett Rope nas 342 Figure 200 ZYXEL Device wib SEN criss tr aret Hn eH RI OAA 343 eMC CSA Pelis c r CE 345 Figure 202 Triangle Route PIOb GN iusso oo ier corsa ats sacra diera iter aia aa caa eda ita 346 Figure 2091F AIS a 346 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 25 List of Figures P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables TIS TADLES aeaa ene ene ree ed 34 Taco c Fon Panel LEES spies tee Ed eee eee remeron pe om a UE pid dela iie bou ameter tenets 36 Table 3 Web Configurator Screens SUFINITRB iias
338. r mode to binary 3 Get rom t file The command get transfers files from the ZyXEL Device to your computer The name rom t is the configuration filename on the ZyXEL Device 4 Edit the rom t file using a text editor do not use a word processor You must leave this FTP screen to edit P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Figure 187 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example c N tp 192 168 1 1 220 PPP FTP version 1 0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03 22 12 2000 User 192 168 1 1 none 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp get rom t ftp bye C Nedit rom t edit the rom t text file by a text editor and save it LES You can rename your rom t file when you save it to your computer but it must be named rom t when you upload it to your ZyXEL Device Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example 1 Launch your FTP application 2 Enter bin The command bin sets the transfer mode to binary 3 Upload your rom t file from your computer to the ZyXEL Device using the put command computer to the ZyXEL Device 4 Exit this FTP application Figure 188 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example e ftp 192 168 1 1 220 PPP FTP version 1 0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03 22 12 2000 User 192 168 1 1 none 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put rom t ftp gt bye P 660H
339. r mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption than TKIP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key 1s never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP
340. r of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 128 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LAST OCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 128 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued suner wask AUR T exer SERRE 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 182 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting QUE EB EM EN EN EM EM NN EN EN NN M i
341. rame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake Ifthe RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or
342. re below Figure 45 Traffic Redirect Example Internet WAN 2 Backup Gateway The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network Put the protected LAN in one subnet Subnet 1 in the following figure and the backup gateway in another subnet Subnet 2 Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN Subnet 1 to the backup gateway Subnet 2 Figure 46 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup Subnet 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 LAN mci Subnet 2 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 2 D L 4 4 A A A M 5 8 Configuring WAN Backup To change your ZyXEL Device s WAN backup settings click Network gt WAN gt WAN Backup Setup The screen appears as shown P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 47 WAN Backup Setup WAN Backup Setup WAN Backup Setup Backup Type psc Link 7 Check WAN IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address 2 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address 3 0 0 0 0 Fail Tolerance o Recovery Interval fo sec Timeout fo sec Traffic Redirect Active Traffic Redirect Metric 15 Backup Gateway Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 WAN Backup Setup
343. rity issues 213 UPnP installation 215 Windows Me 215 Windows XP 216 upper layer protocols 150 151 upstream 33 34 user authentication 106 local user database 106 RADIUS server 107 weaknesses 107 user name 200 V Variable Bit Rate see VBR VBR 83 88 VC 76 VC based multiplexing 76 VCI 77 Virtual Channel Identifier see VCI virtual circuit see VC Virtual Path Identifier see VPI Voice over IP see VoIP VoIP 68 VPI 77 W wall mounting 265 WAN 75 backup 89 WAN setup 75 WAN to LAN rules 158 warranty 349 note 349 web configurator 37 40 41 151 152 157 screen summary 41 WEP 110 encryption 112 Wide Area Network see WAN Wi Fi Multimedia QoS 122 Wi Fi Protected Access 279 wireless client 105 wireless client WPA supplicants 281 wireless LAN 108 wireless network 105 basic guidelines 105 wireless networks channel 105 encryption 107 MAC address filter 106 security 106 SSID 105 wireless security 106 275 wizard icon 53 WLAN interference 273 security parameters 282 world wide web 204 WPA 279 key caching 280 pre authentication 280 user authentication 280 vs WPA PSK 280 wireless client supplicant 281 with RADIUS application example 281 WPA compatibility 108 WPA2 279 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Index user authentication 280 vs WPA2 PSK 280 wireless client supplicant 281 with RADIUS application example 281 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 279 WPA2 PSK 279 280 application example 281 WPA PSK
344. rk eese eennna nnn ninth anna nita anna ntn 205 Figur TIS Remote Management Te NWR GR 206 Figure 174 Remote Management F TP uu asnipeieesnsnet esip npe M REEL VN ME LL 1S ERE LIEU FEVER REL oa 207 Figure 115 SNMP Management Model 2 usscoccn skirt nette ERR n rendi RR kat ERR tend 208 Figure 116 Remote Management SNMP rooted ker ttt tora ad e betta tva e dde pe beet E Rupee 209 Figure TI Remote Management DNS 4 ori b i d net ag e en o pe d ae RO LR IRR SA Rp go aped 211 Figure TIS Remote Management ICMP Or 212 Figure 179 Configuring aur dese 214 Figure 120 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication seseessssss 215 Figure 121 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components 216 Figuie T22 No Wok CONE IE paaa a ann ination nad en dad 216 Figure 123 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard ssseeeen 217 Figure 124 iui Eel c PM 217 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure T25 Rone CONO ONE 55 scsctessssscannentsssaarsiasssssansenes Et Fa ati ga t nh V b RR RD id 218 Figure 126 Intemet Connection Properties 1ioscaseuiiu iretur tt pa Feu rh rp auk ERR hk a kh E REAR FERRE EE EA SHEER EUM MEI I ar E Ed Ge 219 Figure 127 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings eeseeeeee 219 Figure 128 Internet Connection Properties Advanc
345. rom the Security Mode list P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 61 Wireless WPA WPA2 Wireless Setup IV Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Security Security Mode wPA Compatible ReAuthentication Timer Idle Timeout 5600 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer i800 In Seconds Authentication Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Port Number e12 Shared Secret Accounting Server optional IP Address 0 0 0 0 Port Number feias Shared Secret z yXEL Channel 06 2437MHz WPA2 y fisoo In Seconds Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 36 Wireless WPA WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device even when the ZyXEL Device is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 ReAuthentication Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in Timer In Seconds order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout In Seco
346. s MyS rvite ieeucciceeieeee eere r tnn ttrta du itu due ua iaa tuu iba edu dd 169 Figure BO Firewall Anti Probing aise cad waa cat Hope ead xv acca EE aaa Kao epa Ke nga dd 171 Foue ay ali s icio S o EDU 174 Figure 99 Content Filter Ke yeni iuuscpxesssatcexsimeeceinuticen n eter RR FUR RIAL A PEXVERHOCLEEU HA UD LIS WU EE lions 177 Figure 99 Content Filter Schedule iue ces eiie obl Loa end stt rc adr Rica d e Co ERN Fla E ER 178 Figure 108 ecui cndi ELrc 179 Figure TOT Example of Statie Routing Topology 2ossicssiasscenbst enedspeti ndisse asado rid ode UR 183 gs mibX cuixdro lee M 184 Figure 103 Static Route EG que 185 Figure 104 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example sss 188 Figure TUS Bandwidth Management Summary 22 5 5 po tatee eH teet kia qae e Rr Ur Iqer app it oo MERrM PESE noU ERE RUDI 192 Figure 106 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup eese nennen enn tnn anita nana 193 Figure 107 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field eeees sese esee nnne rnnt ninth nnn unn 194 Figure 108 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration c ecesceeeceee ecrit nnne n 195 Figure 109 Bandwidth Management MODIOE i c sss teme ED an E E RP LE RR siais 198 gs dus cy rel cb boa ere Ee 200 Figure 111 Remote Management WWI siscciesestccciessiu gives somine reiia idian a binn tena dade pad 204 Figure 112 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Netwo
347. s Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted 16 3 2 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Inthe Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 122 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools BESISEXSSM Help Operator Assisted Dialing Dial up Preferences Network Identification Bridge Connections Advanced Settings rking Components a ate A n T 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 123 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components 2 Management and Monitoring Tools Networking Services ad Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols
348. s Translation NAT feature of the ZyXEL Device The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your ZyXEL Device but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise 6 3 1 1 Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0
349. s and are only recommended for advanced users 10 2 Firewall Policies Overview Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply LAN to LAN Router WAN to LAN LAN to WAN WAN to WAN Router By default the ZyXEL Device s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions LAN to LAN Router This allows computers on the LAN to manage the ZyXEL Device and communicate between networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface LAN to WAN By default the ZyXEL Device s stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions WAN to LAN WAN to WAN Router This prevents computers on the WAN from using the ZyXEL Device as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN and or managing the ZyXEL Device You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so P 660HW Dx User s Guide 155 Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration LES If you configure firewall rules without a good understanding of how they work you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network Make sure you test your rules after you configure them For example you may create rules to Block certain types of traffic such as IRC Internet Relay Chat from the LAN to the Internet Allow certain types of traffic such as Lotus Notes database synchr
350. s displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port See table Table 41 on page 124 for information on port numbers Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 43 Application Priority Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving your changes P 660HW Dx User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT Screens This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ZyXEL Device 8 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 8 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address
351. s highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device s current configuration to your computer P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 Tools 19 2 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device Table 114 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a Restore Configuration successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the ZyXEL Device again Figure 144 Configuration Restore Successful Restore Configuration successful The Router Is Rebooting Now Please Wait The router will now reboot As there will be no indication of when the process is complete please wait for one minute before attempting to access the router again The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in th
352. s nenas cet resin suot sonuscdes e arae ii 211 Table 88 Remote Management ICMP cccccccusssnccccussneceusssiereeessnnnceeaissanncaenssinecuearinaaneeassiaanaceassions 212 Table Xs als DO Dd ao o o 1m 214 Table SU Sysiem General libr usiescoxtido Peri e ORE Eri oa FRE et ao e oet oo te ada 228 Tabla 97 System Time Seling cts ce Shasta appara St Lana Sp iE ln cds a Seas Sida 230 Table Ar LOG 234 Welle Oo P oke spo m 235 Table 94 System Maintenance Logs ec 237 Tople Ba System Emor LOGS re biin aa id EED R 238 Tablo YG Access Control at tierce aided ernie iesu eaten apne ibaa niente Po pase ikea 238 Table TOF Pest loge EP 239 Tale 99 FACS Le uiudenpeba data ia e ct d prod da HORIS ER LE SR o PULS RU ES KP dte 239 TS I IC NP LODS UR UY 240 table 100 CDR LOOS e 240 i o xui mec 240 Bo PAS ag can Rie 9 e ET 241 Table 103 Content Filtering LOGS Me 241 Te LOOS rirnan cease dia curated ects ea anal EUR I uid Gd EEE 242 Eo 45d coc onis We E 242 RES sm TOE IE LO S 243 TAS Or Deco Saree mers etree peter rec Oper tie mmnnnn a nec ey ern TN 246 Table 108 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes see 247 Tablo 109 ALL Si GIES uci dien I ISSERppO IR RARREUESMERECD den ERE LNRARRLLESM HERR EVE RAUS Ua dut 247 E Xue o ee 248 toule 111 Syslog LOS e
353. s the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the ZyXEL Device sends to the wireless network Table 40 WMM QoS Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS Highest Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter variations in delay Use the highest priority to reduce latency for improved voice quality High Typically used for video traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be prioritized over other data traffic Mid Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities Use mid priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency but is affected by long delays such as Internet surfing Low This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers and print jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Use low priority for applications that do not have strict latency and throughput requirements P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 6 3 Services The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example
354. s using mapping types as outlined in Table 45 on page 132 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your ZyXEL Device Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your ZyXEL Device 8 3 SIP ALG Some applications such as SIP cannot operate through NAT are NAT un friendly because they embed IP addresses and port numbers in their packets data payload Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG An Application Layer Gateway ALG manages a specific protocol such as SIP H 323 or FTP at the application layer A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream When the ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server the SIP ALG translates the ZyXEL Device s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG 132 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 8 4 NAT General Setup You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device Click Network gt NAT to open the following screen Figure 75 NAT General NAT Setup M Active Network Address Translation NAT suUA Only C Full Feature Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 2 Cancel
355. save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 170 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Captu About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software meee ails System Preferences eS gt Location gt 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 171 Macintosh OS X Network eo Network T Lal t wo J Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet B PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP i Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply Now 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box
356. se of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna 1s a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it 1s possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to
357. seeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenenaneneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 37 44 Web Configurator TOVODVIDW is veevssis saicxatudiouniavdisndencenaisiaiiaatidea naaar E NAAA E Enee EEG BIB komen 37 2 2 Aocessing hie Web Coniguralor accchcucuseeccinuinenndnatenntmane eae 37 EA ABE T ca o E 38 2 2 PUAN NRIOL OBSS codd eos e pP ERIS a p sape ii tere a Ee E paa dad opi ad 38 2 3 Reseting AP iR 40 AT Ueno MS Rosal BUTON m M 40 24 Navigating the Web CORIOUESIOE sscsncensensnbinenia nmin 40 24 1 Navigation Panel M 40 zd Be CPIM ids Peine p eid pH ub leak whites df Awa aaah Lede ep edi daly 43 23 5899 g ABS TE TRBIBE iot bre nr et reat enu CaetutH E CAREER DE UAR E ERE Pen pb D rrr ARRA 46 24A Stans WLAN MUG M 46 sd ots Bandwidth SIEUS isinin iaaa MEM I bU FE aaneen aa GR oaasi UR Ra ed 47 24 6 Status Packet SUAUSUCS ee 47 P 660HW Dx User s Guide LE Table of Contents 22 7 Changing Login FASS WONG asiseccctiaeti idee E o POUR OE EO REB GBA RI SA UR 49 PAn I i AN c 5 51 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Tor Internet ACCESS vicicnicisssscsesvesscsancastessniwnsasnactarsoravnsrnarernabsationetnetioiarsonimsntieyte 53 K rre MN IMEEM 53 32 2 Interet Access Wizard SED iue siet eiaase tla Penn E Y NA E PE enantio eee 53 22 1 Auo maie ECTSIOSISUNCIIDT I
358. should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN to LAN applications for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined What method s you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN to LAN application Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application 5 1 3 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols PPPoA RFC 2364 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing is the best combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed The PPP protocol already contains this information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 1 3 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP Selecting RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead 0 octets However if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future it may be safer to select PPPoA encapsulation instead of RFC 1483 so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later 5 1 3 3 Scenario 3 Multiple VCs If you have an equal number or more of VCs than the number of protocols then select RFC 1483 encaps
359. sign a Default Server IP address the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup 8 5 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Table 47 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 8 5 3 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 76 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example E A 192
360. so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 14 1 1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS See Section 14 2 on page 199 for configuration instruction 14 2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your ZyXEL Device s DDNS click Advanced gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown See Section 14 1 on page 199 for more information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 14 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 110 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider ww DynDNS ORG Dy
361. ss s bandwidth budget The classes are set up based on subnets The interface is set to 10240 kbps Each subnet is allocated 2048 kbps The unbudgeted 2048 kbps allows traffic not defined in any of the bandwidth filters to go out when you do not select the maximize bandwidth option Table 70 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration 2048 kbps Sales 2048 kbps Marketing 2048 kbps Research 2048 kbps P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management The ZyXEL Device divides up the unbudgeted 2048 kbps among the classes that require more bandwidth If the administration department only uses 1024 kbps of the budgeted 2048 kbps the ZyXEL Device also divides the remaining 1024 kbps among the classes that require more bandwidth Therefore the ZyXEL Device divides a total of 3072 kbps of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth among the classes that require more bandwidth 13 6 2 1 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth The following table shows the priorities of the bandwidth classes and the amount of bandwidth that each class gets Table 71 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES PRIORITIES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration Priority 4 1024 kbps Sales Priority 6 3584 kbps Marketing Priority 6 3584 kbps Research Priority 5 2048 kbps
362. ss LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 152 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network _ _ A s rape i BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other P 660HW Dx User s Guide 271 Appendix B Wireless LANs ESS Figure 153 Basic Service Set a a o een An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wir
363. ssword other clients may use saved login credentials In either case there is usually a short delay while the wireless client logs in to the wireless network again This value is usually smaller when the wireless network is keeping track of how much time each wireless station is connected to the wireless network for example using an authentication server If the wireless network is not keeping track of this information you can usually set this value higher to reduce the number of delays caused by logging in again Group Key Update Timer In Seconds The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA 2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA 2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations ina WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WLAN setup 7 3 4 WPA WPA2 In order to configure and enable WPA WPA2 click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen Select WPA or WPA2 f
364. stem Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name 17 1 2 General Setup The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name the domain name can be assigned from the ZyXEL Device via DHCP Click Maintenance gt System to open the General screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide 227 Chapter 17 System Figure 134 System General Setup E System Setup System Name Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer Password User Password New Password Retype to confirm Admin Password Old Password New Password A Caution Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password eo minutes 0 means no timeout m m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 System General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setup System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is reco
365. subnet as the ZyXEL Device See Section 6 3 1 on page 95 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Troubleshooting 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the ZyXEL Device with the default IP address See Section 2 3 on page 40 6 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service such as Telnet If you can access the ZyXEL Device check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP f your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to LAN ETHERNET port e can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 Youcannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on 4 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 40 Co e cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen i
366. such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x 278 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 123 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No
367. t OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology allows you to transfer your AP s SSID and WPA PSK security settings to wireless clients that support OTIST and are within transmission range You can also choose to have OTIST generate a WPA PSK key for you if you didn t configure one manually BES OTIST replaces the pre configured wireless settings on the wireless clients 7 4 1 Enabling OTIST You must enable OTIST on both the AP and wireless client before you start transferring settings BES The AP and wireless client s MUST use the same Setup key 7 4 1 1 AP You can enable OTIST using the RESET button or the web configurator 7 4 1 1 1 Reset button If you use the RESET button the default 01234567 or previous saved through the web configurator Setup key is used to encrypt the settings that you want to transfer Hold in the RESET button for three to eight seconds LES If you hold in the RESET button too long the device will reset to the factory defaults P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 4 1 1 2 Web Configurator Click the Network gt Wireless LAN gt OTIST The following screen displays Figure 63 OTIST OTIST OTIST Setup Key Yes Please enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA PSK automatically if no WLAN security has been set This will generate a random PSK key for your convenience Start The following table describes the labels
368. t numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 73 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 13 E 192168112 IGA3 192 168 1 13 IGA4 g m d x 192 168 1 12 192 168 1 10 2c Internet Nm Ed 192 168 1 11 S Inside Local Inside Global 192 168 1 10 Addresses ILA Addresses IGA 8 1 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP Alias behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks More examples follow at the end of this chapter P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Figure 74 NAT Application With IP Alias A LAN1 192 168 1 X 2j i B 192 168 1 1 E JP IGA 1 LA N2 192 168 2 X 192 1682 1 Ga IP3 IGA 3 192 168 3 1 LJ 8 1 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are One to One In One to One mode the ZyXEL Device maps one local IP address to one global IP address Many to One In Many to One mode the ZyXEL Device maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA for instance PAT port address translation ZyX
369. tained between the antenna of this device and all persons TEX KIR ERD a LEE Ee EE HRA EH TAR SUBIT ERU AS ISTA ERE JERR RI ZH RREH NEE A ES DUAR ENCORE Ite P RETE ms s pa FUR ESTAS eae A 88 HI Mae BR ER RE GT TERRI EISH Wiech REFER A oe BE A HMA RE DE ESE HER EL ESTHER SE SASH BCLS BER Be ee iit FA RE TE a sc ZTE ifs RESET O a ae ay a SS 3 Ga t au En Kd E ARDEA FEA ERER MET BERR E Tit PE VAD FEMA ae ERE A Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page P 660HW
370. tart Click Restart to have the ZyXEL Device reboot This does not affect the ZyXEL Device s configuration Figure 147 Restart Screen System Reboot Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart P 660HW Dx User s Guide 255 Chapter 19 Tools P 660HW Dx User s Guide Diagnostic These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device 20 1 General Diagnostic Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the screen shown next Figure 148 Diagnostic General General TCP IP Address Ping Resolving 192 168 1 34 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Ping Host Successful The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 115 Diagnostic General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered 20 2 DSL Line Diagnostic Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line to open the screen shown next P 660HW Dx User s Guide 257 Chapter 20 Diagnostic Figure 149 Diagnostic DSL Line
371. tch between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 protocol The listed rule s IKE phase 2 protocol did not match between mismatch the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 encryption The listed rule s IKE phase 2 encryption algorithm did not algorithm mismatch match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 The listed rule s IKE phase 2 authentication algorithm did not authentication algorithm match between the router and the peer mismatch Rule d Phase 2 The listed rule s IKE phase 2 encapsulation did not match encapsulation mismatch between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 pfs The listed rule s IKE phase 2 perfect forward secret pfs mismatch setting did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 ID mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 ID did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 hash The listed rule s IKE phase 1 hash did not match between the mismatch router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 preshared The listed rule s IKE phase 1 pre shared key did not match key mismatch between the router and the peer Rule d Tunnel built The listed rule s IPSec tunnel has been built successfully successfully Rule d Peer s public key The listed rule s IKE phase 1 peer s public key was not found not found Rule d Verify peer s The listed rule s IKE phase verification of the peer s signature failed signature failed Rule d Sending IKE IKE sent an IK
372. te Management Configuration 203 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 213 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your ZyXEL Device 12 1 Static Route Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the ZyXEL Device has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the ZyXEL Device knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the ZyXEL Device is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node Router via gateway Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the ZyXEL Device about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 101 Example of Static Routing Topology N1 T 4 E VA T PA ii 12 2 Configuring Static Route Click Advanced gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Static Route Figure 102 Static Route Static Route oan OU amp ON M A m m m d pat nan amp WN 02 Static Route Rules ECCONNECNN TTC TREAT 15738 CT test 10 10 1 2 192 168 1 3 255 0 0 0 T E UR UD GU UA Eb E E E E E B E Eb E Eb E E E E BD Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an
373. te set 1 Metric 0 20101007 IP Static Route set 1 Private lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Menu 12 1 2 IP Static Route Setup FIN F PVA INPUT 120108001 IP Static Route set 8 Name lt Str gt 120108002 IP Static Route set 8 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 120108003 IP Static Route set 8 Destination 0 0 0 0 IP address 120108004 IP Static Route set 8 Destination 0 IP subnetmask 120108005 IP Static Route set 8 Gateway 0 0 0 0 120108006 IP Static Route set 8 Metric 0 120108007 IP Static Route set 8 Private lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Table 142 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup Menu 15 SUA Server Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 150000001 SUA Server IP address for default 0 0 0 0 port 150000002 SUA Server 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000003 SUA Server 2 Protocol lt 0 Al11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 142 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup continued 150000004 SUA Server 2 Port Start 0 150000005 SUA Server 2 Port End 0 150000006 SUA Server 2 Local IP address 0 150000007 SUA Server 3 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000008 SUA Server 3 Protocol X0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 50000009 SUA Server 3 Port Start 0
374. ter 14 Dynamic DNS Setup Table 81 Dynamic DNS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Select this option only when there are one or more NAT routers between the ZyXEL server auto Device and the DDNS server This feature has the DDNS server automatically detect IP detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP address Address Note The DDNS server may not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the ZyXEL Device and the DDNS server Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a static IP address Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 14 Dynamic DNS Setup P 660HW Dx User s Guide Remote Management Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring remote management 15 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which ZyXEL Device interface if any from which computers LES When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access You may manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location via Internet WAN only ALL LAN and WAN LAN only Neither Disable BES When you choose WAN only o
375. that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action 8 7 1 Address Mapping Rule Edit To edit an address mapping rule click the rule s edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next Figure 80 Edit Address Mapping Rule Edit Address Mapping Rule1 Type One to One Ss Local Start IP 0 0 0 0 Local End IP N A Global Start IP 0 0 0 0 Global End IP N A Server Mapping Set N A Edit Details Back Apply Cancel IEEE P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 51 Edit Address Mapping Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Choose the port mapping type from one of the following One to One One to One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for One to one NAT mapping type Many to One Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only Many to Many Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type
376. that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies PHB consists of two types of services EF Expedited Forwarding and AF Assured Forwarding EF has higher priority EF guarantees services with minimal loss and delay AF has four sub classes each with three levels of importance drop precedence A high drop precedence means low importance Table 77 Sub Classes of AF Services DIFFSERV PRIORITY PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE SUB CLASS4 AF41 AF42 AF43 SUB CLASS3 AF31 AF32 AF33 SUB CLASS2 AF21 AF22 AF23 SUB CLASS1 AF11 AF12 AF13 Rule Configuration Click the Edit icon or select User Defined from the Service drop down list in the Rule Setup screen to configure a bandwidth management rule Use bandwidth rules to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to specific applications and or subnets P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Bandwidth Management Figure 108 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration Rule Configuration M Active Rule Name E Mail Bw Budget fio Kbps Priority Mia 7 M use All Managed Bandwidth Enable DiffServ Marking DiffServ mark 58H DSCP_EF Filter Configuration Service User defined Y Destination Address noo Destination
377. the check box to enable WMM QoS on the ZyXEL Device WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the ZyXEL Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application names services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS This is the number of an individual application entry Name This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM Qos Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic Priority This field displays the WMM QoS priority for traffic bandwidth Modify Click the to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 2 Application Priority Configuration To edit a WMM QoS application entry click the edit icon Bf under Modify The following screen displays Figure 72 Applica
378. the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order P 660HW Dx User s Guide 233 Chapter 18 Logs Figure 136 View Log View Logs Display All Logs 7 Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log Q nune WEB Login Successfully User admin 2 Lobo ned none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1197 alee a 3 srl none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1196 Bari m 4 M none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1195 NU 5 aes WEB Login Successfully User user The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop down list box Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Message This field states the reason for the log Source This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Notes This field displays additional information about the log entry Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e mail address specified in the Log Settings page make sure that you have first filled i
379. the wizard screen without saving your changes 2 The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use All screens shown are with routing mode Configure the fields and click Next to continue P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access Figure 21 Internet Connection with PPPoE STEP1 STEP 2 ffi Internet Configuration e and P d given to you by your Internet Service Provider here If ce Nam it in the third field User Name Service Name optional Note Device is automatically configured to obtain an IP address automatically The ISP will assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Beck Aen st The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 9 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes Figure 22 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 STEP 1 STEP 2 ffi Internet C
380. ting Connectivity Starting Connectivity Monitor Monitor Time initialized by Daytime The router got the time and date from the Daytime server Server Time initialized by Time The router got the time and date from the time server server Time initialized by NTP The router got the time and date from the NTP server server Connect to Daytime server The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server fail Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server Too large ICMP packet has The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large been dropped Configuration Change PC The router is saving configuration changes Ox x Task ID Ox x Successful SSH login Someone has logged on to the router s SSH server SSH login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s SSH server Successful HTTPS login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol HTTPS login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol Table 95 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s exceeds the max This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of session per number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host host setNetBIOSFilter calloc The router fail
381. tion Priority Configuration Name Service Dest Port Priority Application Priority Configuration E Mail 25 1965535 Highest Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 43 Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Application Priority Configuration Name Type a description of the application priority Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser e User Defined User defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications Dest Port Thi
382. tiple ZyXEL Devices Internal SPTGEN lets you configure save and upload multiple menus at the same time using just one configuration text file eliminating the need to navigate and configure individual screens for each ZyXEL Device You can use FTP to get the Internal SPTGEN file Then edit the file in a text editor and use FTP to upload it again to the same device or another one See the following sections for details The Configuration Text File Format All Internal SPTGEN text files conform to the following format lt field identification number field name parameter values allowed input where input is your input conforming to parameter values allowed The figure shown next is an example of an Internal SPTGEN text file Figure 184 Configuration Text File Format Column Descriptions Menu 1 General Setup 10000000 Configured 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000001 System Name Str Your Device 10000002 Location Str B 10000003 Contact Person s Name Str d 10000004 Route IP 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000005 Route IPX lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 10000006 Bridge 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 P 660HW Dx User s Guide 315 Appendix F Internal SPTGEN BS DO NOT alter or delete any field except parameters in the Input column This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage Actual menus for y
383. tivate deactivate this static route Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same Address network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Static Route P 660HW Dx User s Guide Bandwidth Management This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management editing rules and viewing the ZyXEL Device s bandwidth management logs 13 1 Bandwidth Management Overview ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and or subnet You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to different bandwidth rules The ZyXEL
384. tomatically assign a WPA key Recommended to have the ZyXEL Device create a pre shared key WPA PSK automatically only if your wireless clients support WPA and OTIST This option is available only when you enable OTIST in the previous wizard screen Select Manually assign a WPA PSK key to configure a pre shared key WPA PSK Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA See Section 3 3 1 on page 63 for more information Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key See Section 3 3 2 on page 63 for more information Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Note If you enable OTIST in the previous wizard screen but select Disable wireless security here the ZyXEL Device still creates a pre shared key WPA PSK automatically If you enable OTIST and select Manually assign a WEP key the ZyXEL Device will replace the WEP key with a WPA PSK Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Access LES The wireless stations and ZyXEL Device must use the same SSID channel ID and WEP encryption key if WEP is enabled WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled for wireless communication 4 This screen v
385. tup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Figure 52 DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Pool Size DNS Server DHCP Setup IP Pool Starting Address Remote DHCP Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Server 192 168 1 33 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 DHCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Setup DHCP If set to Server your ZyXEL Device can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case When DHCP is used the following items need to be set IP Pool Starting Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Remote DHCP Server If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here DNS Server
386. twork Browser ColorSync Recent Applications Control Strip i Recent Documents Date amp Time cit Remote Access Status p Energy Saver Scrapbook Extensions Manager 49 Sherlock 2 File Exchange Speakable Items File Sharing y Stickies General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech tartup D Amr Bl USB Printer Sharing 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 169 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Li TCP IP E Gmet vn Setup Configure Using DHCP Server t DHCP Client ID l IP Address lt will be supplied by server 7 Sunet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr x will be supplied by server 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually 294 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to
387. ty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer 5 4 Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you turn on and connect the ZyXEL Device to a telephone jack it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information such as an Internet account user name and password is required or the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Zero configuration for Internet access is disable when the ZyXEL Device is in bridge mode you set the ZyXEL Device to use a static fixed WAN IP address 5 5 Internet Connection To change your ZyXEL Device s WAN Internet access settings click Network gt WAN The screen differs by the encapsulation See Section 5 1 on page 75 for more information P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 40 Internet Connection PPPoE Internet Connection General Name myISP Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPOE 7 User Name Password Service Name l Multiplexing fie x Virtual Circuit ID VPI e VCI 35 IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically C static IP Address IP Address fo 0 0 0 Connection C Nailed Up Con
388. ulation and VC based multiplexing 5 1 4 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers assigned to you The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Please see the appendix for more information 5 1 5 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway 5 1 5 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A If you have a static IP then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field 5 1 5 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP Address Assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above 5 1 5 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP However for a dynamic IP the ZyXEL Device acts as a DHCP client o
389. ule Sap aussexonsterikistaniuun e peri nna AN 137 Figure 79 Address Mapping Rules 14 asc Mose de i dodo Le aeo ou Good a Dd et uta M acd dod 138 Figure 80 Edit Address Mapping Rule 112i E npa ead a epa Kad and qa E pag nd 139 Figure 61 Firewall Ap PUGAHON c 145 22 P 660HW Dx User s Guide List of Figures Figure ARI cuius Mgcgc1 M 146 ao bo rmgerd lier eM ETE NU 147 Figure 04 SUT AILAGK deme 147 Figurg 95 oisbelul spp DB cito dico a acta pta d dab ada b ra Fd aa ado Eo ean Fd alba a dod 149 Foue dui Wall t 0 0 CET 158 Figure 87 Firewall RUES 160 Figure 30 Firewall Edit FR c innne errena es NENNE PANE EE EEEE EN ENEAN PA KENESE E ENERSEN EE 162 Figure B9 Firewall Customized OQEISICBS usui anten Dope iP eH EH ED ME EUR R a a 164 Figure 90 Firewall Configure Customized Services cccccccccceeseesccceeesseecceeeensecceeeesseeaacenenseeceenenees 165 Figure 91 Firewall Example EUles aside ede cepe e ERE KR ERE EIU aad Ex Leod ad dd 166 Figure 92 Edit Custom Port EXamplgo 2 riii tumet eer enoni tope od natae appe Ipse saure danni asus Eve poop EE 166 Figure 93 Firewall Example Edit Rule Destination Address cccccccccsccceeseeecceceeneeeeceenenseeaeeenneneas 167 Figure 94 Firewall Example Edit Rule Select Customized Services essei arent etta hens 168 Figure 95 Firewall Example Rule
390. und to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation P 660HW Dx User s Guide 347 Appendix L Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help fa FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter JEEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be main
391. up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 191 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PR Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet MER zone Medium privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable tj information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing v Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 192 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 4 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a p
392. ure the system s hostname domain name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 175 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate v STEHT redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue XNo Yes Eu 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0 configuration file where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor f you have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO field The following figure shows an example P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 176 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconf
393. user e n the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Ina RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section 7 2 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See Section 7 2 3 on page 106 for information about this Table 31 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
394. ut protocol filters Set 3 256 30100012 Output protocol filters Set 4 256 30100013 Output device filters Set 1 256 30100014 Output device filters Set 2 256 30100015 Output device filters Set 3 256 30100016 Output device filters Set 4 256 P 660HW Dx User s Guide Appendix F Internal SPTGEN Table 139 Menu 3 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 30200001 DHCP lt 0 None 0 1 Server 2 Relay gt 30200002 Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 30200003 Size of Client IP Pool 32 30200004 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 30200005 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 30200006 Remote DHCP Server 0 0 0 0 30200008 IP Address 172 21 2 200 30200009 IP Subnet Mask 16 30200010 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30200011 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30200012 Multicast O IGMP v2 zu 1 IGMP v1 2 None 30200013 IP Policies Set 1 1 12 256 30200014 IP Policies Set 2 1 12 256 30200015 IP Policies Set 3 1 12 256 30200016 IP Policies Set 4 1 12 256 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup FIN F PVA INPUT 30201001 IP Alias 1 lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt 30201002 IP Address 0 0 0 0 30201003 IP Subnet Mask 0 30201004 RIP Direction
395. ve your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 4 1 Configuring Advanced LAN Setup To edit your ZyXEL Device s advanced LAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen The screen appears as shown Figure 51 Advanced LAN Setup RIP Version Multicast Any IP Setup Iv Active RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP E M Allow between LAN and WAN Both g RIP 1 IGMP v1 Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it Any IP Setup Select the Active check box to enable the Any IP feature This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address a
396. ver the number of half open sessions with the same destination host address rises above a threshold TCP Maximum Incomplete the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half open sessions according to one of the following methods Ifthe Blocking Time timeout is 0 the default then the ZyXEL Device deletes the oldest existing half open session for the host for every new connection request to the host This ensures that the number of half open sessions to a given host will never exceed the threshold If the Blocking Time timeout is greater than 0 then the ZyXEL Device blocks all new connection requests to the host giving the server time to handle the present connections The ZyXEL Device continues to block all new connection requests until the Blocking Time expires e 10 10 3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds The ZyXEL Device also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all TCP connections Click Firewall and Threshold to bring up the next screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 97 Firewall Threshold Threshold Denial of Service Thresholds One Minute Low so Sessions per Minute One Minute High fico Sessions per Minute Maximum Incomplete Low eo Sessions Maximum Incomplete High Roo Sessions TCP Maximum Incomplete Ro Sessions Action taken when TCP Maximum Incomplete reached threshol
397. vices visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website For further information on these services please read Section 10 8 on page 169 Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port This displays the following screen Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information Figure 89 Firewall Customized Services E ko oo p Jo jen B foo no I Customized Services EET GNE EC NC SN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Customized Services LABEL DESCRIPTION No This is the number of your customized port Click a rule s number of a service to go to a Screen where you can configure or edit a customized service See Section 10 6 3 on page 164 for more information Name This is the name of your customized service Protocol This shows the IP protocol TCP UDP or TCP UDP that defines your customized service Port This is the port number or range that defines your customized service Back Click Back to return the Firewall Edit Rule screen 10 6 3 Configuring a Customized Service Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to create a new custom port or edit an existing one This action displays the following screen P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information Figure
398. vity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the ZyXEL Device if this happens 2 3 Resetting the ZyXEL Device If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the ZyXEL Device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 2 3 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the ZyXEL Device restarts 2 4 Navigating the Web Configurator 2 4 1 Navigation Panel After you enter the admin password use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure ZyXEL Device features The following table describes the sub menus P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ZyXEL Figure 8 Web Configurator Main Screen gt Status Biren Use the submenus to configure ZyXEL Device features Device Information Host Name Model Number MAC Address ZyNOS Firmware Version DSL Firmware Version WAN Information DSL Mode IP Address Security Firewall Content Filter Refresh Interval None E Click the Logout icon at any t S
399. w pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 189 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Setting Synchronize pr xo Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy P 660HW Dx User s Guide 333 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 190 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet gt zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LC information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable pop
400. wn IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server WLAN Information LAN 3 Down SSID ZyXEL Channel 6 Security WPA PSK WLAN 125M G LAN 2 Down LAN 4 Up 100M Full Duplex 2 2 2 Administrator Access 1 For administrator access enter the default admin password 1234 to configure the wizards and the advanced features 2 Click Login to proceed to a screen asking you to change your password or click Cancel to revert to the default password 3 Ifyou entered the admin password it is highly recommended you change the default admin password Enter a new password between 1 and 30 characters retype it to P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator confirm and click Apply Alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now BES If you do not change the password at least once the following screen appears every time you log in with the admin password Figure 6 Change Password at Login 4 Select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply to display the wizard main screen Otherwise select Go to Advanced setup and click Apply to display the Status screen Figure 7 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator LES The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inacti
401. work devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your ZyXEL Device supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network The ZyXEL Device supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation P 660HW Dx User s Guide 207 Chapter 15 Remote Management Configuration SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 115 SNMP Management Model MANAGER AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the ZyXEL Device An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple r
402. xed 7 Max Frame Burst fo 0 1800 Maximum Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Wireless LAN Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold Enter a value between 0 and 2432 Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and 2432 Output Power Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device in this field This control changes the strength of the ZyXEL Device s antenna gain or transmission power Antenna gain is the increase in coverage Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications If there is a high density of APs within an area decrease the output power of the ZyXEL Device to reduce interference with other APs The options are Maximum Middle and Minimum Preamble Select Long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Select Short preamble if you are sure the wireless adapters support it and to provide more efficient communications Select Dynamic to have the ZyXEL Device automatically use short preamble when wireless adapters support it otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device Sel
403. y to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 6 Firewall Rules Summary BS The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn Refer to Section 9 1 on page 143 for more information Click Security gt Firewall gt Rules to bring up the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules Note the order in which the rules are listed P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewall Configuration Figure 87 Firewall Rules Rules ov fill 1 Ww o aX Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 3 Packet Direction Create a new rule after rule number fi 7 Destination e active Sope Pestypuen service ___ action schedule tog Noditylorder any 7 100 wan to LAN Move the rule tolo Move any v NetBIOS TCPAUDP 137 139 445 v Permit No No amp fi bN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Firewall Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use This read only bar shows how much of the ZyXEL Device s memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using When you are using 80 or less of the storage space the bar is green When the amount of space used is over 80 the bar is red Packet Direction Use the drop down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for w
404. you do not assign a Default Server IP address the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Port Forwarding Service Name Select a service from the drop down list box Server IP Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service Address Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below This is the rule index number read only Active Click this check box to enable the rule Service Name This is a service s name Start Port This is the first port number that identifies a service End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service Server IP This is the server s IP address Address Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 8 6 1 Port Forwarding Rule Edit To edit a port forwarding rule click the rule s edit icon gp in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen shown next P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Figure 78 Port Forwarding Rule Setup Rule Setup M Active Service Name Wy Wy Start P
405. ystem Uptime COUPER Current Date Tim tO EXit the web configurator 00 13 49 09 12 14 System Mode X3 40 AGL 4 b2 CPU Usage d 3 30 undnum Memory Usage a 7 TI AR 07 00 04 00 0 0 0 0 nterface atus 0 0 0 0 Interface Status interface status Rate 0 0 0 0 8 35 DSL Down 0 kbps 0 kbps 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 LAN 1 Up 100M Full Duplex LAN 2 LAN 3 LAN 4 Disable WLAN 125M G Enabled Disable Summary AnyIP Table WLAN Status Bandwidth Status Packet Statistics LES Click the amp icon located in the top right corner of most screens to view embedded help Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION Wizard INTERNET Use these screens for initial configuration including general WIRELESS setup ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP DNS SETUP Server MAC address assignment BANDWIDTH Use these screens to limit bandwidth usage by application or MANAGEMENT packet type SETUP Logout g Click this icon to exit the web configurator Status This screen shows the ZyXEL Device s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the summary statistics tables Network WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties More Connections
406. zed settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 18 3 1 Example E mail Log An End of Log message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent The following is an example of a log sent by e mail Youmay edit the subject title The date format here is Day Month Year The date format here is Month Day Year The time format is Hour Minute Second e End of Log message shows that a complete log has been sent P 660HW Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Logs Figure 138 E mail Log Example Subject Firewall Alert From xxxxx Date Fri From 128 End Apr 10 user zyxel com user zyxel com 00 From 192 168 1 1 src port 00520 dest port 00520 7 54 2 05 03 UDP 07 Apr 2000 10 05 42 00 From 192 168 1 131 src port 00520 dest port 00520 00 From 192 168 1 6 src port 03516 dest port 00053 17 UDP 00 From 192 168 1 1 src port 00520 dest port 00520 00 From 192 168 1 131 src port 00520 dest port 00520 00 From 192 168 1 1 30 UDP of Firewall Log src port 00520 dest port 00520 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 1 00 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 1 00 To 10 10 10 10 match forward 1 01 To2192 168 14 255 match forward 1 02 To2192 168 1 255 match forward 1 02 Tc T192 T7T6871 255 match forward 1 02 18 4 Log D

ZyXEL P-660HW-DX User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents